Ultra Start 3280 series Service manual

Ultra Start 3280 series Service manual
Part No. 05138SL (Rev. A)
Service Manual
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Preface
The purpose of this publication is to provide the service
technician with information for troubleshooting, testing,
and repair of major systems and components on the
Groundsmaster 3280−D and Groundsmaster 3320.
REFER TO THE TRACTION UNIT AND CUTTING
UNIT OPERATOR’S MANUALS FOR OPERATING,
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS. Space is provided in Chapter 2 of this book to
insert the Operator’s Manuals and Parts Catalogs for
your machine. Replacement Operator’s Manuals are
available on the internet at www.toro.com or by sending
complete Model and Serial Number to:
The Toro Company
Attn. Technical Publications
8111 Lyndale Avenue South
Minneapolis, MN 55420
The Toro Company reserves the right to change product
specifications or this publication without notice.
This safety symbol means DANGER, WARNING,
or CAUTION, PERSONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTION. When you see this symbol, carefully read
the instructions that follow. Failure to obey the
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: A NOTE will give general information about the
correct operation, maintenance, service, testing, or repair of the machine.
IMPORTANT: The IMPORTANT notice will give important instructions which must be followed to prevent damage to systems or components on the
machine.
The Toro Company − 2005, 2007
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chapter 6 − Electrical System
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 2
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 4
Safety and Instruction Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 4
Electrical Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 4
Electrical System Quick Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 8
Component Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 10
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 − 28
Chapter 2 − Product Records and Maintenance
Product Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equivalents and Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2−1
2−1
2−2
2−3
Chapter 7 − Chassis
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 2
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 − 4
Product Records
and Maintenance
Chapter 1 − Safety
Safety
Table Of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 2
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 3
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 − 4
KUBOTA WORKSHOP MANUAL: 05 SERIES DIESEL
ENGINE
8−2
8−3
8−4
8−6
Diesel
Engine
Chapter 4 − Diesel Engine
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic
System
Chapter 8 − Drive Axles
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 3
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 4
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 − 6
BRIGGS & STRATTON/DAIHATSU REPAIR MANUAL
FOR 3−CYLINDER, LIQUID−COOLED, GASOLINE
ENGINES
Gasoline
Engine
Chapter 3 − Gasoline Engine
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Rev. A
Chassis
Drive
Axles
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 3
Hydraulic Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 6
Hydraulic Flow Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 8
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 14
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 16
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 19
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 27
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 − 28
SAUER−DANFOSS (SUNDSTRAND) 15 SERIES
REPAIR MANUAL
SAUER−DANFOSS (SUNDSTRAND) 15 SERIES
SERVICE MANUAL
SAUER−DANFOSS STEERING UNIT TYPE OSPM
SERVICE MANUAL
Electrical
System
Chapter 5 − Hydraulic System
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chapter 11 − Electrical Diagrams
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 − 2
Electrical Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 3
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 5
Wire Harness Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 − 12
Chapter 10 − Cutting Units
Electrical
Diagrams
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 3
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 4
Service and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 − 6
Cutting
Units
Chapter 9 − P.T.O. System
P.T.O.
System
Table Of Contents (Continued)
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Safety
Table of Contents
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
While Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
2
2
2
3
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY AND INSTRUCTION DECALS . . . . . . . . . . 4
Page 1 − 1
Safety
Safety
Chapter 1
Safety Instructions
The Groundsmaster 3280−D and 3320 meet or exceeds
CEN standard EN 836:1997, ISO standard 5395:1990
(when appropriate decals applied), and ANSI
B71.4−2004 specifications when weights are installed
according to information in the Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual. Although hazard control and accident prevention partially are dependent upon the design and configuration of the machine, these factors are also
dependent upon the awareness, concern and proper
training of the personnel involved in the operation, transport, maintenance and storage of the machine. Improp-
er use or maintenance of the machine can result in injury
or death. To reduce the potential for injury or death,
comply with the following safety instructions.
WARNING
To reduce the potential for injury or death,
comply with the following safety instructions.
Before Operating
1. Read and understand the contents of the Operator’s
Manual before starting and operating the machine. Become familiar with the controls and know how to stop the
machine and engine quickly. A replacement Operator’s
Manual is available on the Internet at www.Toro.com or
by sending the complete model and serial number to:
4. Since fuel is highly flammable, handle it carefully:
A. Store fuel in containers specifically designed for
this purpose.
B. Do not remove machine fuel tank cap while engine is hot or running.
The Toro Company
Attn. Technical Publications
8111 Lyndale Avenue South
Bloomington, Minnesota 55420−1196
C. Do not smoke while handling fuel.
D. Fill fuel tank outdoors and only to within an inch of
the top of the tank, not the filler neck. Do not overfill.
2. Keep all shields, safety devices and decals in place.
If a shield, safety device or decal is defective, illegible
or damaged, repair or replace it before operating the
machine. Also tighten any loose nuts, bolts or screws to
ensure machine is in safe operating condition.
E. Replace fuel tank and fuel container caps securely after refueling machine.
F. If fuel is spilled, do not attempt to start the engine
but move the machine away from the area of the
spillage. Avoid creating any source of ignition until
fuel vapors have dissipated. Wipe up any spilled fuel.
3. Assure interlock switches are adjusted correctly so
engine cannot be started unless traction pedal is in
NEUTRAL and P.T.O. switch is OFF (disengaged).
While Operating
1. Sit on the seat when starting and operating the machine.
3. Do not run engine in a confined area without adequate ventilation. Exhaust fumes are hazardous and
could possibly be deadly.
2. Before starting the engine:
A. Engage the parking brake.
B. Make sure traction pedal is in neutral and the
P.T.O. switch is OFF (disengaged).
4. Do not touch engine, radiator or exhaust system
while engine is running or soon after it is stopped. These
areas could be hot enough to cause burns.
5. Before getting off the seat:
C. After engine is started, release parking brake and
keep foot off traction pedal. Machine must not move.
If movement is evident, the traction pedal linkage is
adjusted incorrectly; therefore, shut engine off and
adjust traction pedal linkage until machine does not
move when traction pedal is released (see Traction
Unit Operator’s Manual).
Safety
Page 1 − 2
A. Ensure that traction pedal is in neutral.
B. Lower and disengage cutting deck (or implement) and wait for all movement to stop.
C. Set parking brake.
D. Stop engine and remove key from ignition switch.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
7. Do not park on slopes unless wheels are chocked or
blocked.
Safety
6. Anytime the machine is parked (short or long term),
the cutting deck (or implement) should be lowered to the
ground. This relieves pressure from the lift circuit and
eliminates the risk of the cutting deck (or implement) accidentally lowering to the ground.
Maintenance and Service
1. Before servicing or making adjustments, lower cutting deck (or implement), stop engine, set parking brake
and remove key from the switch.
11. Do not overspeed the engine by changing governor
setting. To assure safety and accuracy, check maximum
engine speed with a tachometer.
2. Make sure machine is in safe operating condition by
keeping all nuts, bolts and screws tight.
12.Shut engine off before checking or adding oil to the
crankcase.
3. Never store the machine or fuel container inside
where there is an open flame, such as near a water heater or furnace.
13.Disconnect battery before servicing the machine.
Disconnect negative battery cable first and positive
cable last. If battery voltage is required for troubleshooting or test procedures, temporarily connect the battery.
Reconnect positive cable first and negative cable last.
4. Make sure all hydraulic line connectors are tight, and
all hydraulic hoses and lines are in good condition before applying pressure to the hydraulic system.
5. Keep body and hands away from pin hole leaks in hydraulic lines that eject high pressure hydraulic fluid. Use
cardboard or paper to find hydraulic leaks. Hydraulic
fluid escaping under pressure can penetrate skin and
cause injury. Fluid accidentally injected into the skin
must be surgically removed within a few hours by a doctor familiar with this form of injury or gangrene may result.
6. Before disconnecting or performing any work on the
hydraulic system, all pressure in the system must be relieved by lowering the cutting deck (or implement) to the
ground, stopping the engine and then using all of the hydraulic controls (depressing the traction pedal, turning
the steering wheel and moving the lift/lower lever to both
raise and lower).
7. If major repairs are ever needed or assistance is desired, contact an Authorized Toro Distributor.
8. Use care when checking or servicing the cutting
deck. Wear gloves and use caution when servicing it.
9. To reduce potential fire hazard, keep engine area
free of excessive grease, grass, leaves and dirt. Clean
protective screen on machine frequently.
10.If engine must be running to perform maintenance or
to make an adjustment, keep hands, feet, clothing and
other parts of the body away from the cutting deck and
other moving parts. Keep bystanders away.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
14.Battery acid is poisonous and can cause burns.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing. Protect your
face, eyes and clothing when working with a battery.
15.Battery gases can explode. Keep cigarettes, sparks
and flames away from the battery.
16.If welding on the machine is necessary, disconnect
the negative battery cable to prevent electrical system
damage.
17.At the time of manufacture, the machine conformed
to the safety standards for riding mowers. To assure optimum performance and continued safety certification of
the machine, use genuine Toro replacement parts and
accessories. Replacement parts and accessories made
by other manufacturers may result in non-conformance
with the safety standards, and the warranty may be
voided.
18.When changing attachments, tires or performing
other service, use correct blocks, hoists and jacks.
Make sure machine is parked on a solid level floor such
as a concrete floor. Prior to raising the machine, remove
any attachments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock or block
wheels. Use jack stands or solid wood blocks to support
the raised machine. If the machine is not properly supported by blocks or jack stands, the machine may move
or fall, which may result in personal injury (see Jacking
Instructions in this section).
Page 1 − 3
Safety
Jacking Instructions
Rear End Jacking
CAUTION
1. Set parking brake and chock both front tires to prevent the machine from moving.
When changing attachments, tires or performing other service, use correct blocks, hoists
and jacks. Make sure machine is parked on a
solid level surface such as a concrete floor.
Prior to raising machine, remove any attachments that may interfere with the safe and proper raising of the machine. Always chock or
block wheels. Use jack stands or solid wood
blocks to support the raised machine. If the machine is not properly supported by blocks or
jack stands, the machine may move or fall,
which may result in personal injury.
2. Place jack securely under the frame (not the axle) directly in front of the rear axle.
3. Jack rear of machine off the ground.
4. Position jack stands or hardwood blocks under the
frame to support the machine.
Front End Jacking
1. Set parking brake and chock rear tires to prevent the
machine from moving.
2. Position jack securely under the frame (not the axle),
just to the inside of the front tire.
3. Jack front of machine off the ground.
4. Position jack stands or hardwood blocks under the
frame as close to the wheel as possible to support the
machine.
Safety and Instruction Decals
Numerous safety and instruction decals are affixed to
the traction unit and the cutting deck of the Groundsmaster. If any decal becomes illegible or damaged, install a new decal. Part numbers are listed in your Parts
Catalog. Order replacement decals from your Authorized Toro Distributor.
Safety
Page 1 − 4
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chapter 2
Product Records and Maintenance
PRODUCT RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIVALENTS AND CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . .
Decimal and Millimeter Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . .
U.S. to Metric Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastener Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
Standard Torque for Dry, Zinc Plated and
Steel Fasteners (Inch Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Torque for Dry, Zinc Plated and
Steel Fasteners (Metric Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
5
6
6
Product Records
Insert Operator’s Manuals and Parts Catalogs for your
Groundsmaster at the end of this chapter. Additionally,
if any optional equipment or accessories have been
installed to your Groundsmaster, insert the Installation
Instructions, Operator’s Manuals and Parts Catalogs for
those options at the end of this chapter.
Maintenance
Maintenance procedures and recommended service intervals for the Groundsmaster 3280−D and Groundsmaster 3320 are covered in the Operator’s Manual.
Refer to that publication when performing regular equipment maintenance.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 2 − 1
Product Records and Maintenance
Product Records
and Maintenance
Table of Contents
Equivalents and Conversions
Product Records and Maintenance
Page 2 − 2
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Recommended fastener torque values are listed in the
following tables. For critical applications, as determined
by Toro, either the recommended torque or a torque that
is unique to the application is clearly identified and specified in this Service Manual.
These Torque Specifications for the installation and
tightening of fasteners shall apply to all fasteners which
do not have a specific requirement identified in this Service Manual. The following factors shall be considered
when applying torque: cleanliness of the fastener, use
of a thread sealant (e.g. Loctite), degree of lubrication
on the fastener, presence of a prevailing torque feature,
hardness of the surface underneath the fastener’s head
or similar condition which affects the installation.
As noted in the following tables, torque values should be
reduced by 25% for lubricated fasteners to achieve
the similar stress as a dry fastener. Torque values may
also have to be reduced when the fastener is threaded
into aluminum or brass. The specific torque value
should be determined based on the aluminum or brass
material strength, fastener size, length of thread engagement, etc.
The standard method of verifying torque shall be performed by marking a line on the fastener (head or nut)
and mating part, then back off fastener 1/4 of a turn.
Measure the torque required to tighten the fastener until
the lines match up.
Fastener Identification
Grade 1
Grade 5
Grade 8
Class 8.8
Inch Series Bolts and Screws
Metric Bolts and Screws
Figure 1
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Class 10.9
Figure 2
Page 2 − 3
Product Records and Maintenance
Product Records
and Maintenance
Torque Specifications
Standard Torque for Dry, Zinc Plated and Steel Fasteners (Inch Series)
Thread Size
Grade 1, 5 &
8 with Thin
Height Nuts
SAE Grade 1 Bolts, Screws, Studs &
Sems with Regular Height Nuts
(SAE J995 Grade 2 or Stronger Nuts)
in−lb
in−lb
N−cm
10 + 2
13 + 2
147 + 23
# 6 − 32 UNC
# 6 − 40 UNF
# 8 − 32 UNC
13 + 2
25 + 5
# 10 − 24 UNC
30 + 5
SAE Grade 8 Bolts, Screws, Studs &
Sems with Regular Height Nuts
(SAE J995 Grade 5 or Stronger Nuts)
in−lb
N−cm
in−lb
N−cm
15 + 2
169 + 23
23 + 3
262 + 34
17 + 2
192 + 23
25 + 3
282 + 34
29 + 3
328 + 34
41 + 5
463 + 56
31 + 4
350 + 45
43 + 5
486 + 56
42 + 5
475 + 56
60 + 6
678 + 68
48 + 5
542 + 56
68 + 7
768 + 79
282 + 56
# 8 − 36 UNF
18 + 2
SAE Grade 5 Bolts, Screws, Studs &
Sems with Regular Height Nuts
(SAE J995 Grade 2 or Stronger Nuts)
339 + 56
# 10 − 32 UNF
1/4 − 20 UNC
48 + 7
53 + 7
599 + 79
100 + 10
1130 + 113
140 + 15
1582 + 169
1/4 − 28 UNF
53 + 7
65 + 10
734 + 113
115 + 12
1299 + 136
160 + 17
1808 + 192
5/16 − 18 UNC
115 + 15
105 + 15
1186 + 169
200 + 25
2260 + 282
300 + 30
3390 + 339
5/16 − 24 UNF
138 + 17
128 + 17
1446 + 192
225 + 25
2542 + 282
325 + 33
3672 + 373
ft−lb
ft−lb
N−m
ft−lb
N−m
ft−lb
N−m
3/8 − 16 UNC
16 + 2
16 + 2
22 + 3
30 + 3
41 + 4
43 + 5
58 + 7
3/8 − 24 UNF
17 + 2
18 + 2
24 + 3
35 + 4
47 + 5
50 + 6
68 + 8
7/16 − 14 UNC
27 + 3
27 + 3
37 + 4
50 + 5
68 + 7
70 + 7
95 + 9
7/16 − 20 UNF
29 + 3
29 + 3
39 + 4
55 + 6
75 + 8
77 + 8
104 + 11
1/2 − 13 UNC
30 + 3
48 + 7
65 + 9
75 + 8
102 + 11
105 + 11
142 + 15
1/2 − 20 UNF
32 + 4
53 + 7
72 + 9
85 + 9
115 + 12
120 + 12
163 + 16
5/8 − 11 UNC
65 + 10
88 + 12
119 + 16
150 + 15
203 + 20
210 + 21
285 + 28
5/8 − 18 UNF
75 + 10
95 + 15
129 + 20
170 + 18
230 + 24
240 + 24
325 + 33
3/4 − 10 UNC
93 + 12
140 + 20
190 + 27
265 + 27
359 + 37
375 + 38
508 + 52
3/4 − 16 UNF
115 + 15
165 + 25
224 + 34
300 + 30
407 + 41
420 + 43
569 + 58
7/8 − 9 UNC
140 + 20
225 + 25
305 + 34
430 + 45
583 + 61
600 + 60
813 + 81
7/8 − 14 UNF
155 + 25
260 + 30
353 + 41
475 + 48
644 + 65
667 + 66
904 + 89
NOTE: Reduce torque values listed in the table above
by 25% for lubricated fasteners. Lubricated fasteners
are defined as threads coated with a lubricant such as
engine oil or thread sealant such as Loctite.
NOTE: The nominal torque values listed above for
Grade 5 and 8 fasteners are based on 75% of the minimum proof load specified in SAE J429. The tolerance is
approximately + 10% of the nominal torque value. Thin
height nuts include jam nuts.
NOTE: Torque values may have to be reduced when
installing fasteners into threaded aluminum or brass.
The specific torque value should be determined based
on the fastener size, the aluminum or base material
strength, length of thread engagement, etc.
Product Records and Maintenance
Page 2 − 4
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Standard Torque for Dry, Zinc Plated and Steel Fasteners (Metric Series)
Class 8.8 Bolts, Screws and Studs with
Regular Height Nuts
(Class 8 or Stronger Nuts)
Class 10.9 Bolts, Screws and Studs with
Regular Height Nuts
(Class 10 or Stronger Nuts)
M5 X 0.8
57 + 6 in−lb
644 + 68 N−cm
78 + 8 in−lb
881 + 90 N−cm
M6 X 1.0
96 + 10 in−lb
1085 + 113 N−cm
133 + 14 in−lb
1503 + 158 N−cm
M8 X 1.25
19 + 2 ft−lb
26 + 3 N−m
28 + 3 ft−lb
38 + 4 N−m
M10 X 1.5
38 + 4 ft−lb
52 + 5 N−m
54 + 6 ft−lb
73 + 8 N−m
M12 X 1.75
66 + 7 ft−lb
90 + 10 N−m
93 + 10 ft−lb
126 + 14 N−m
M16 X 2.0
166 + 17 ft−lb
225 + 23 N−m
229 + 23 ft−lb
310 + 31 N−m
M20 X 2.5
325 + 33 ft−lb
440 + 45 N−m
450 + 46 ft−lb
610 + 62 N−m
NOTE: Reduce torque values listed in the table above
by 25% for lubricated fasteners. Lubricated fasteners
are defined as threads coated with a lubricant such as
engine oil or thread sealant such as Loctite.
NOTE: The nominal torque values listed above are
based on 75% of the minimum proof load specified in
SAE J1199. The tolerance is approximately + 10% of the
nominal torque value.
NOTE: Torque values may have to be reduced when
installing fasteners into threaded aluminum or brass.
The specific torque value should be determined based
on the fastener size, the aluminum or base material
strength, length of thread engagement, etc.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 2 − 5
Product Records and Maintenance
Product Records
and Maintenance
Thread Size
Other Torque Specifications
SAE Grade 8 Steel Set Screws
Wheel Bolts and Lug Nuts
Recommended Torque
Thread Size
Recommended Torque**
Thread Size
Square Head
Hex Socket
1/4 − 20 UNC
140 + 20 in−lb
73 + 12 in−lb
5/16 − 18 UNC
215 + 35 in−lb
145 + 20 in−lb
3/8 − 16 UNC
35 + 10 ft−lb
18 + 3 ft−lb
1/2 − 13 UNC
75 + 15 ft−lb
50 + 10 ft−lb
7/16 − 20 UNF
Grade 5
65 + 10 ft−lb
88 + 14 N−m
1/2 − 20 UNF
Grade 5
80 + 10 ft−lb
108 + 14 N−m
M12 X 1.25
Class 8.8
80 + 10 ft−lb
108 + 14 N−m
M12 X 1.5
Class 8.8
80 + 10 ft−lb
108 + 14 N−m
** For steel wheels and non−lubricated fasteners.
Thread Cutting Screws
(Zinc Plated Steel)
Type 1, Type 23 or Type F
Thread Size
Baseline Torque*
No. 6 − 32 UNC
20 + 5 in−lb
No. 8 − 32 UNC
Thread Cutting Screws
(Zinc Plated Steel)
Thread
Size
Threads per Inch
Baseline Torque*
Type A
Type B
No. 6
18
20
20 + 5 in−lb
30 + 5 in−lb
No. 8
15
18
30 + 5 in−lb
No. 10 − 24 UNC
38 + 7 in−lb
No. 10
12
16
38 + 7 in−lb
1/4 − 20 UNC
85 + 15 in−lb
No. 12
11
14
85 + 15 in−lb
5/16 − 18 UNC
110 + 20 in−lb
3/8 − 16 UNC
200 + 100 in−lb
* Hole size, material strength, material thickness and finish must be considered when determining specific
torque values. All torque values are based on non−lubricated fasteners.
Conversion Factors
in−lb X 11.2985 = N−cm
ft−lb X 1.3558 = N−m
Product Records and Maintenance
N−cm X 0.08851 = in−lb
N−m X 0.7376 = ft−lb
Page 2 − 6
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chapter 3
Gasoline Engine
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Oil to Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Throttle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Choke Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Engine Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
3
4
4
4
5
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
BRIGGS & STRATTON/DAIHATSU REPAIR MANUAL
FOR 3−CYLINDER, LIQUID−COOLED, GASOLINE
ENGINES
This Chapter gives information about specifications,
troubleshooting, testing and repair of the Briggs & Stratton/Daihatsu gasoline engine used in the Groundsmaster 3320.
Service and repair parts for Briggs & Stratton/Daihatsu
gasoline engines are supplied through your local Toro
Distributor. If no parts list is available, be sure to provide
your distributor with the Toro model and serial number.
Introduction
Most repairs and adjustments require tools which are
commonly available in many service shops. The use of
some specialized test equipment is explained in the engine service manual found at the end of this chapter.
However, the cost of the test equipment and the specialized nature of some repairs may dictate that the work be
done at an engine repair facility.
Groundsmaster 3320
Page 3 − 1
Gasoline Engine
Gasoline
Engine
Table of Contents
Specifications
Item
Description
Make / Designation
Briggs & Stratton/Daihatsu, 4−stroke,
Liquid Cooled, OHV, Gasoline
Number of Cylinders
3
Bore x Stroke mm (in.)
72 x 78 (2.834 x 3.07)
Total Displacement cc (cu. in.)
952 (58.1)
Compression Ratio
8.6:1
Firing Order
1−2−3
Dry Weight (approximate) kg (lb.)
62 (137)
Fuel
Unleaded, regular grade (87 octane minimum)
Carburetor
Single barrel, float feed, 12 VDC shut−off solenoid
Fuel Tank Capacity liter (U.S. gal.)
48.5 (12.8)
Governor
Mechanical
Idle Speed (no load)
1400 to 1550 RPM
High Idle (no load)
3100 to 3250 RPM
Engine Oil
API Service Classification SE or better
(see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for viscosity)
Oil Pump
Gear driven trochoid type
Crankcase Oil Capacity liter (U.S. qt.)
3.3 (3.5) with filter
Water Pump
Belt driven centrifugal type
Cooling System Capacity (including reserve tank) liter (U.S. qt.)
4.3 (4.5)
Starter
12 VDC 1.2 KW
Alternator/Regulator
12 VDC 40 AMP
Gasoline Engine
Page 3 − 2
Groundsmaster 3320
General Information
Adding Oil to Engine
Gasoline
Engine
When adding oil to the engine, maintain clearance between the oil fill device and the oil fill opening in the valve
cover (Fig. 1). This clearance is necessary to allow venting when adding engine oil which will prevent oil from
running into the breather tube and intake system.
Figure 1
Groundsmaster 3320
Page 3 − 3
Gasoline Engine
Adjustments
Adjust Throttle Control
Proper throttle operation is dependent upon proper adjustment of throttle control. Make sure throttle control is
operating properly.
2
3
1. Move remote throttle control lever to FAST position.
2. Check position of speed control lever on governor
bracket. Speed control lever should be contacting high
speed screw when throttle control lever is in FAST position.
3. If necessary, throttle control can be adjusted by loosening cable clamp screw and repositioning control cable
until speed control lever contacts high speed screw
when throttle control lever is in FAST position.
4
1
Figure 2
1. Speed control lever
2. Throttle control cable
3. Cable clamp screw
4. High speed screw
Adjust Choke Control
Proper cold engine starting is dependent upon proper
adjustment of choke control. Make sure choke control
is operating properly.
2
1. Move choke control lever to START position.
2. Check position of choke lever on carburetor. Choke
lever should be fully closed when choke lever is in
START position.
1
3. If necessary, choke control can be adjusted by loosening cable clamp screw and repositioning choke cable
until carburetor choke lever is fully closed when choke
control lever is in START position.
Figure 3
1. Choke cable
Gasoline Engine
Page 3 − 4
2. Cable clamp screw
Groundsmaster 3320
Adjust Engine Speed
1. Allow engine to reach operating temperature before
checking or adjusting engine speed. Make sure that
throttle control is adjusted properly before adjusting engine speed (see Adjust Throttle Control in this section).
2
3
2. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement) and engage parking brake. Make sure
that P.T.O. switch is OFF. Raise hood to gain access to
engine controls.
1
3. With engine running, move remote throttle control lever to FAST position.
Figure 4
1. Speed control lever
2. High speed screw
5. If high idle speed is incorrect, adjust high speed
screw on governor bracket (Fig. 4).
3. Lock nut
Gasoline
Engine
4. Using a tachometer, check that engine is operating
at 3100 to 3250 RPM.
2
A. Loosen lock nut on high speed screw.
3
B. Adjust high speed screw to obtain 3100 to 3250
RPM.
1
C. Tighten lock nut. Recheck high speed.
6. Move remote throttle control lever to SLOW position.
7. Rotate and hold carburetor throttle lever against the
idle speed screw (Fig. 5). Using a tachometer, check
that engine idle speed is 1400 to 1550 RPM. If idle
speed is incorrect, adjust carburetor idle speed screw to
obtain 1400 to 1550 RPM.
Figure 5
1. Carburetor
2. Throttle lever
Groundsmaster 3320
Page 3 − 5
3. Idle speed screw
Gasoline Engine
Service and Repairs
Fuel System
5
6
4
26
7
3
8
2
9
1
27
28
25
16
12
29
21
10
30
19
20
13
24
12
11
17
19
13
18
23
22
15
12
14
19
15
16
RIGHT
FRONT
32
31
Figure 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Fuel tank
Seat plate
Flange head screw (2 used)
Grommet
Knob
Bypass cover
Threaded insert
Flange nut (2 used)
Radiator support
Vent tube
R−clamp
Gasoline Engine
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Hose clamp
Fuel hose (tank venting)
Fuel hose (fuel pump to carburetor)
Hose clamp
Fuel hose (fuel supply)
Carriage screw (2 used)
Fuel cap
Grommet
Elbow fitting
Grommet plug
Stand pipe
Page 3 − 6
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Grommet
Fuel gauge
Control panel
Thumb screw (4 used)
Retaining ring
Cap screw
Flat washer
Spacer
Lock nut
Flat washer
Groundsmaster 3320
9. Disconnect fuel hoses from standpipe (item 22) and
elbow fitting (item 20) on the top of the fuel tank.
DANGER
10.Remove fuel tank using Figure 6 as a guide.
Because gasoline is highly flammable, use caution when storing or handling it. Do not smoke
while filling the fuel tank. Do not fill fuel tank
while engine is running, hot, or when machine is
in an enclosed area. Always fill fuel tank outside
and wipe up any spilled fuel before starting the
engine. Store fuel in a clean, safety−approved
container and keep cap in place. Use gasoline
for the engine only; not for any other purpose.
Fuel Tank Installation (Fig. 6)
1. Install fuel tank to frame using Figure 6 as a guide.
2. Connect fuel hoses to standpipe (item 22) and elbow
fitting (item 20) on the top of the fuel tank. Secure hoses
with clamps.
3. Secure lower control panel to machine with flange
head screws and flange nut (Fig. 7).
Check Fuel Lines and Connections
4. Secure tank to left fender with flat washer (item 32)
and lock nut (item 31).
5. Position control panel to fuel tank, connect wire harness to panel components and secure panel to machine
with thumb screws.
Drain and Clean Fuel Tank
6. Install seat plate to machine.
Drain and clean the fuel tank periodically as recommended in the Traction Unit Operator’s Manual. Also,
drain and clean the fuel tank if the fuel system becomes
contaminated or if the machine is to be stored for an extended period.
7. Install seat suspension and seat to machine (see
Standard Seat or Suspension Seat Installation in Service and Repairs section of Chapter 7 − Chassis).
To clean fuel tank, flush tank out with clean solvent.
Make sure tank is free of contaminates and debris.
8. Connect seat switch to machine wire harness. Close
hood.
9. Fill fuel tank (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Fuel Tank Removal (Fig. 6)
3
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch. Open hood.
2
2
4
2. Unplug seat switch from machine wire harness.
1
3. Remove seat and seat suspension from machine
(see Standard Seat or Suspension Seat Removal in
Service and Repairs section of Chapter 7 − Chassis).
5
4. Remove seat plate (item 2) from machine.
5. Remove thumb screws that secure control panel
(item 25) to fuel tank. Unplug wire harness connections
from panel components and remove panel.
7
6
6. Remove flange head screws and flange nut that secure lower control panel to machine (Fig. 7).
7. Remove lock nut (item 31) and flat washer (item 32)
from left fender.
8. Use a fuel transfer pump to remove fuel from the fuel
tank and into a suitable container.
Groundsmaster 3320
Figure 7
1.
2.
3.
4.
Knob
Flange head screw
Choke control
Lower control panel
Page 3 − 7 Rev. A
5. Throttle control
6. Lift control lever
7. Flange nut
Gasoline Engine
Gasoline
Engine
Check fuel lines and connections periodically as recommended in the Traction Unit Operator’s Manual. Check
lines for deterioration, damage, leaking or loose connections. Replace hoses, clamps and connections as
necessary.
Air Cleaner
10
11
1
9
2
3
4
5
5
8
RIGHT
7
FRONT
6
Figure 8
1.
2.
3.
4.
Air cleaner assembly
Flat washer (2 used)
Lock nut
Air inlet hose
5.
6.
7.
8.
Hose clamp
Cap screw (2 used)
Lock washer (2 used)
Spacer
9. Air inlet hose
10. Cap screw (2 used)
11. Mounting bracket
Removal
2
1
1. Remove air cleaner components as needed using
Figures 8 and 9 as guides.
2. See Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for air cleaner
service procedures.
5
Installation
IMPORTANT: Any leaks in the air filter system will
allow unfiltered air to enter engine and will cause
serious engine damage. Make sure that all air cleaner components are in good condition and are properly secured during assembly.
1. Assemble air cleaner system using Figures 8 and 9
as guides. Make sure that vacuator valve is pointed
down after assembly.
Gasoline Engine
4
3
Figure 9
1. Bracket
2. Cover
3. Vacuator valve
Page 3 − 8
4. Pipe nipple
5. Indicator
Groundsmaster 3320
Gasoline
Engine
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3320
Page 3 − 9
Gasoline Engine
Radiator
34
33
27
RIGHT
20
13
7
FRONT
21
22
26
19
23
25
28
24
29
5
18
30
3
31
1
2
8
32
17
3
16
13
4
6
14
9
15
11
9
12
10
3
Figure 10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Radiator
Hydraulic hose
Screw (8 used)
Radiator shield
Intake cover
Flange nut (8 used)
Screen
Radiator support
Pop rivet (5 used)
Backup washer (5 used)
Draincock
Vent hose
Gasoline Engine
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Hose clamp
Vent tube
Clamp (2 used)
Lower radiator hose
Hose clamp
Upper radiator hose
Fan shroud
Cap screw (4 used)
Flat washer (4 used)
Pop rivet (2 used)
Reservoir bracket
Page 3 − 10
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Hydraulic hose
Coolant reservoir
Hose
Reservoir cap
Overflow hose
Radiator cap
Lock nut (4 used)
Radiator shim
Foam strip
Lock nut (2 used)
Latch (2 used)
Groundsmaster 3320
Removal (Fig. 10)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
9. Remove four (4) cap screws, flat washers and lock
nuts that secure fan shroud to radiator. Position fan
shroud away from the radiator.
10.Support the radiator assembly before loosening
mounting fasteners.
2. Open hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
11. Remove screws and flange nuts that secure radiator
to radiator support.
Do not open radiator cap or drain coolant if the
radiator or engine is hot. Pressurized, hot coolant can escape and cause burns.
12.Carefully pull radiator assembly from the machine.
Locate and retrieve radiator shim (item 31). Plug radiator and hose openings to prevent contamination.
Installation (Fig. 10)
Ethylene−glycol antifreeze is poisonous. Dispose of coolant properly, or store it in a properly
labeled container away from children and pets.
1. Remove any plugs placed during the removal procedure.
3. Drain coolant from radiator (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
2. Carefully position radiator assembly to the radiator
support. Place radiator shim (item 31) between radiator
and support. Secure radiator with screws and flange
nuts.
4. Remove screen from machine (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
CAUTION
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all
hydraulic controls to relieve system pressure
and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
5. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from radiator. Position
hoses away from radiator.
6. Disconnect radiator hoses (upper and lower) from
the radiator.
7. Loosen hose clamp and remove overflow hose from
radiator fill opening.
8. Remove coolant reservoir from bracket on fan
shroud.
Groundsmaster 3320
3. Position fan shroud to the radiator. Secure fan
shroud to radiator with four (4) cap screws, flat washers
and lock nuts. Make sure that a minimum of .250” (6.4
mm) clearance exists at all points between shroud and
fan.
4. Apply hydraulic thread sealant to hydraulic hose fitting threads. Connect hydraulic hoses to radiator.
5. Connect upper and lower radiator hoses.
6. Install coolant reservoir to bracket on fan shroud.
7. Connect overflow hose to radiator fill opening and
secure with hose clamp.
8. Make sure radiator drain plug is tight. Fill radiator
with coolant (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
9. Install screen to machine (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
10.Close hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Page 3 − 11
Gasoline Engine
Gasoline
Engine
CAUTION
Engine
7
10
5
8
6
9
5
4
50 to 60 ft−lb
(68 to 81 N−m)
11
3
2
12
16
13
26
14 15
25
14
1
17
18
28
19
50 to 60 ft−lb
(68 to 81 N−m)
24
26
25
RIGHT
20
24
FRONT
21
21
22
22
27
23
20
23
Figure 11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Engine
Muffler bracket
Lock washer
Negative battery cable
Flat washer
Cap screw
Flange head screw
Flange nut
Muffler gasket
Muffler
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Hex nut (4 used)
Frame trim
Spacer
Cap screw (2 used per mount)
Engine shock mount (red patch)
Air cleaner mounting bracket
Lock nut (3 used)
Flat washer (3 used)
Engine shock mount (3 used)
Removal (Fig. 11)
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Engine mount bracket
Spacer (4 used)
Rebound washer (4 used)
Cap screw (4 used)
Lock nut (2 used per mount)
Lock washer (2 used per mount)
Cap screw (2 used per mount)
Lock washer (1 used)
Engine mount bracket
3. Disconnect negative (−) and then positive (+) battery
cables at the battery.
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine and remove key from the
ignition switch. Chock wheels to keep the machine from
moving.
4. Remove battery from machine (see Battery Service
in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 6 − Electrical System).
2. Open hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Gasoline Engine
Page 3 − 12
Groundsmaster 3320
5. Remove cap screws and flange nuts that secure battery base to brackets. Remove battery base from machine (Fig. 12).
1
5
+−
6
CAUTION
2
3
Do not open radiator cap or drain coolant if the
radiator or engine is hot. Pressurized, hot coolant can escape and cause burns.
Ethylene−glycol antifreeze is poisonous. Dispose of coolant properly, or store it in a properly
labeled container away from children and pets.
4
Figure 12
1. Battery
2. Cap screw (3 used)
3. Battery base
4. Flange nut (3 used)
5. Lock washer
6. Ground cable
7. Loosen hose clamp and remove overflow hose from
radiator fill opening (Fig. 13). Remove coolant reservoir
from bracket on radiator fan shroud.
4
3
6
7
5
8. Remove four (4) cap screws, flat washers and lock
nuts that secure fan shroud to radiator (Fig. 13). Position
fan shroud away from the radiator.
8
2
1
9. Remove P.T.O. shaft from machine (see P.T.O. Shaft
Removal in Service and Repairs section of Chapter 9 −
P.T.O. System).
10.Remove air cleaner (see Air Cleaner Removal in this
section).
11. Loosen screw that secures cable clamp to governor
bracket (Fig. 14). Remove throttle and choke cables
from governor levers. Position cables away from the engine.
12.Disconnect hoses from engine.
Figure 13
1.
2.
3.
4.
A. Loosen clamps and disconnect upper and lower
radiator hoses from the engine.
Radiator
Lock nut
Hose clamp
Overflow hose
2
5.
6.
7.
8.
Coolant reservoir
Flat washer
Cap screw
Fan shroud
1
B. At carburetor, loosen hose clamp and disconnect
fuel hose. Plug hose to prevent leakage and contamination.
13.Disconnect transmission drive shaft from engine
pulley (see Hydraulic Transmission Drive Shaft Removal in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 5 − Hydraulic System).
3
14.Remove cotter pin and clevis pin that secure hood
cable to muffler bracket on rear of engine. Support hood
in the open position.
Figure 14
1. Cable clamp
2. Throttle cable
Groundsmaster 3320
Page 3 − 13
3. Choke cable
Gasoline Engine
Gasoline
Engine
6. Drain coolant from radiator (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
15.Disconnect wire harness connectors from the following engine components:
5
NOTE: Label all electrical leads for reassembly purposes.
3
4
A. Alternator connector and stud.
B. High temperature shut down switch and temperature sender located on the water pump housing.
4
3
6
C. Fuel solenoid on carburetor.
D. Oil pressure switch located near the engine oil
dipstick.
3
E. Ignition coils located on the right side of the engine.
F. Connector, fusible link connector and positive
battery cable from the starter motor.
G. Wire harness ground wire from the muffler bracket.
H. P.T.O. clutch wire connector.
4
3
1
2
7
Figure 15
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gasoline engine
Engine bracket
Flat washer
Cap screw
5. Pivot plate
6. Engine bracket
7. Engine bracket
Installation (Fig. 11)
1. Locate machine on a level surface with cutting deck
(or implement) lowered and key removed from the ignition switch. Chock wheels to keep the machine from
moving.
I. Crank position wire connector.
16.Remove engine from machine:
A. Attach short section of chain between lift tabs located on each end of the cylinder head.
2. Make sure that all parts removed from the engine
during maintenance or rebuilding are reinstalled to the
engine.
B. Connect a hoist or chain fall at the center of the
short section of chain. Apply enough tension on the
short chain so that the engine will be supported.
3. If engine brackets were removed from the engine,
reinstall them to engine (Fig. 15).
C. Remove fasteners that secure the engine (with
brackets) to the engine shock mounts and engine
mount brackets.
4. If engine mount brackets (items 20 and 28) were removed from frame, secure them to frame with cap
screws and lock washers. Torque screws from 50 to 60
ft−lb (68 to 81 N−m).
CAUTION
One person should operate lift or hoist while the
other person guides the engine out of the machine.
IMPORTANT: Make sure not to damage the engine,
fuel hoses, hydraulic lines, electrical harness or
other parts while removing the engine.
IMPORTANT: The left, rear shock mount (item 15) is
different than the other three mounts (item 19). If
shock mounts were removed from engine mount
brackets on frame, make sure that shock mount
with red patch is correctly installed at left, rear position.
5. Position fan shroud around the engine fan.
6. Reinstall engine to machine.
A. Attach short section of chain between lift tabs located on each end of the cylinder head
D. Raise engine and remove from machine.
17.If necessary, remove engine brackets from engine
(Fig. 15).
Gasoline Engine
Page 3 − 14
B. Connect a hoist or chain fall at the center of the
short section of chain. Apply enough tension on the
short chain so that the engine can be supported.
Groundsmaster 3320
12.Install air cleaner (see Air Cleaner Installation in this
section).
One person should operate lift or hoist while the
other person guides the engine into the machine.
IMPORTANT: Make sure not to damage the engine,
fuel hoses, hydraulic lines, electrical harness or
other parts while installing the engine.
C. Lower engine to the machine frame. Make sure
that the engine bracket holes are aligned with the
holes in the engine shock mounts.
D. Secure engine to the engine mounts.
7. Install clevis pin and cotter pin to secure hood cable
to muffler bracket.
8. Connect transmission drive shaft to engine pulley
(see Hydraulic Transmission Drive Shaft Installation in
the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 5 − Hydraulic System).
IMPORTANT: Make sure that clutch pulley and
P.T.O. pulley are aligned during P.T.O. shaft installation.
13.Install P.T.O. shaft to machine (see P.T.O. Shaft
Installation in Service and Repairs section of Chapter 9
− P.T.O. System).
14.Position fan shroud to radiator. Make sure that a
minimum of .250” (6.4 mm) clearance exists at all points
between shroud and fan. Secure fan shroud to radiator
with four (4) cap screws, flat washers and lock nuts.
15.Install coolant reservoir to bracket on radiator fan
shroud (Fig. 13). Install overflow hose to radiator fill
opening and secure with hose clamp.
16.Add coolant to radiator (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
NOTE: Make sure to attach negative battery cable as
battery base is installed.
9. Reconnect all wire harness connectors to engine
components.
17.Position battery base to brackets and secure with
cap screws and flange nuts (Fig. 12).
10.Remove plugs installed in hoses during disassembly. Connect hoses to the engine.
18.Install battery to machine (see Battery Service in the
Service and Repairs section of Chapter 6 − Electrical
System).
A. Connect fuel hose to the carburetor inlet fitting.
Secure with hose clamp.
B. Connect upper and lower radiator hoses to the
engine. Secure with hose clamps.
11. Position throttle and choke cables to engine governor levers (Fig. 14). Secure cables to governor bracket
with cable clamp and screw. Adjust cables (see Adjust
Throttle Control and Adjust Choke Control in the Adjustments section of this chapter).
Groundsmaster 3320
19.Check engine oil level (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
20.Connect positive (+) and then negative (−) battery
cables to the battery.
21.Close hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Page 3 − 15
Gasoline Engine
Gasoline
Engine
CAUTION
This page is intentionally blank.
Gasoline Engine
Page 3 − 16
Groundsmaster 3320
Chapter 4
Diesel Engine
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Throttle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
3
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
KUBOTA WORKSHOP MANUAL: 05 SERIES DIESEL
ENGINE
This Chapter gives information about specifications,
troubleshooting, testing and repair of the Kubota
1105NA diesel engine used in the Groundsmaster
3280−D.
Service and repair parts for Kubota diesel engines are
supplied through your local Toro Distributor. If a parts list
is not available, be sure to provide your distributor with
the Toro model and serial number.
Most repairs and adjustments require tools which are
commonly available in many service shops. The use of
some specialized test equipment is explained in the engine service manual included at the end of this chapter.
However, the cost of the test equipment and the specialized nature of some repairs may dictate that the work be
done at an engine repair facility.
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Page 4 − 1
Diesel Engine
Diesel
Engine
Introduction
Specifications
Item
Description
Make / Designation
Kubota, 4−stroke,
Liquid Cooled, OHV Diesel
Number of Cylinders
3
Bore x Stroke mm (in.)
78 x 78.4 (3.07 x 3.09)
Total Displacement cc (cu. in.)
1123 (68.53)
Compression Ratio
22.0:1
Firing Order
1 (front) − 2 − 3
Dry Weight (approximate) kg (lb.)
93 (205)
Fuel
No. 2−D Diesel Fuel (ASTM D975)
Fuel Injection Pump
Bosch MD type mini
Fuel Injector Nozzle
Mini Nozzle (DNOPD)
Fuel Tank Capacity liter (U.S. gal.)
48.5 (12.8)
Governor
Centrifugal Mechanical
Idle Speed (no load)
1500 to 1650 RPM
High Idle (no load)
3100 to 3250 RPM
Engine Oil
API Classification CH−4, CI−4 or higher
(see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for viscosity)
Oil Pump
Gear driven trochoid type
Crankcase Oil Capacity liter (U.S. qt.)
3.8 (4.0) with filter
Cooling System Capacity (including reserve tank) liter (U.S. qt.)
7.6 (8)
Starter
12 VDC 1.4 KW
Alternator/Regulator
12 VDC 40 AMP
Diesel Engine
Page 4 − 2
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Adjustments
Adjust Throttle Control
Proper throttle operation is dependent upon proper adjustment of throttle control. Make sure throttle control is
operating properly.
2
3
1. Move remote throttle control lever to FAST position.
2. Check position of speed control lever on fuel injection pump. Speed control lever should be contacting
high speed screw when throttle control lever is in FAST
position.
Figure 1
1. Throttle cable
2. High speed screw
3. Speed control lever
Diesel
Engine
3. If necessary, throttle control can be adjusted by loosening cable clamp screw and repositioning control cable
until speed control lever contacts high speed screw.
1
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Page 4 − 3
Diesel Engine
Service and Repairs
Fuel System
5
6
4
26
7
3
8
9
2
10
30
21
1
11
11
25
12
20
31
16
32
20
19
11
24
13
33
19
12
17
12
18
23
15
22
11
16
14
15
19
29
28
16
27
RIGHT
FRONT
35
34
Figure 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Fuel tank
Seat plate
Flange head screw (2 used)
Grommet
Knob
Bypass cover
Threaded insert
Flange nut (2 used)
Radiator support
Vent tube
Hose clamp
Fuel hose (tank venting)
Diesel Engine
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
R−clamp
Fuel hose (fuel pump to separator)
Hose clamp
Fuel hose (fuel supply)
Carriage screw (2 used)
Fuel cap
Grommet
Elbow fitting
Fuel hose (return)
Stand pipe
Grommet
Fuel gauge
Page 4 − 4
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
Control panel
Thumb screw (4 used)
Fuel/water separator
Fitting
Fuel hose (separator to injector)
Retainer
Cap screw
Flat washer
Spacer
Flat washer
Lock nut
Groundsmaster 3280−D
9. Disconnect fuel hoses from standpipe (item 22) and
elbow fittings (item 20) on the top of the fuel tank.
DANGER
10.Remove fuel tank using Figure 2 as a guide.
Because diesel fuel is highly flammable, use
caution when storing or handling it. Do not
smoke while filling the fuel tank. Do not fill fuel
tank while engine is running, hot or when machine is in an enclosed area. Always fill fuel tank
outside and wipe up any spilled diesel fuel before starting the engine. Store fuel in a clean,
safety−approved container and keep cap in
place. Use diesel fuel for the engine only; not for
any other purpose.
Check Fuel Lines and Connections
Check fuel lines and connections periodically as recommended in the Traction Unit Operator’s Manual. Check
lines for deterioration, damage, leaking or loose connections. Replace hoses, clamps and connections as
necessary.
Fuel Tank Installation (Fig. 2)
1. Install fuel tank to frame using Figure 2 as a guide.
2. Connect fuel hoses to standpipe (item 22) and elbow
fittings (item 20) on the top of the fuel tank. Secure fuel
hoses with hose clamps.
3. Secure lower control panel to machine with flange
head screws and flange nut (Fig. 3).
4. Secure tank to left fender with flat washer (item 34)
and lock nut (item 35).
5. Position control panel to fuel tank, connect wire harness to panel components and secure panel to machine
with thumb screws.
6. Install seat plate to machine.
Drain and clean the fuel tank periodically as recommended in the Traction Unit Operator’s Manual. Also,
drain and clean the fuel tank if the fuel system becomes
contaminated or if the machine is to be stored for an extended period.
7. Install seat suspension and seat to machine (see
Standard or Suspension Seat Installation in Service and
Repairs section of Chapter 7 − Chassis).
8. Connect seat switch to machine wire harness.
9. Fill fuel tank (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
To clean fuel tank, flush tank out with clean diesel fuel.
Make sure tank is free of contaminates and debris.
2
Fuel Tank Removal (Fig. 2)
2
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
3
1
4
2. Unplug seat switch from machine wire harness.
3. Remove seat and seat suspension from machine
(see Standard or Suspension Seat Removal in Service
and Repairs section of Chapter 7 − Chassis).
4. Remove seat plate (item 2) from machine.
6
5. Remove thumb screws that secure control panel to
fuel tank. Unplug wire harness connections from panel
components and remove panel from machine.
5
6. Remove flange head screws and flange nut that secure lower control panel to machine (Fig. 3).
7. Remove lock nut (item 35) and flat washer (item 34)
from left fender.
Figure 3
1. Knob
2. Flange head screw
3. Lower control panel
4. Throttle control
5. Lift control lever
6. Flange nut
8. Use a fuel transfer pump to remove fuel from the fuel
tank and into a suitable container.
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Page 4 − 5 Rev. A
Diesel Engine
Diesel
Engine
Drain and Clean Fuel Tank
Air Cleaner
8
5
7
1
2
6
3
4
5
5
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 4
1. Air cleaner assembly
2. Flat washer (2 used)
3. Lock nut (2 used)
4. Intake air hose
5. Hose clamp
6. Air hose
7. Cap screw (2 used)
8. Air cleaner mount
Removal
2
1
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch. Raise hood.
5
2. Remove air cleaner components as needed using
Figures 4 and 5 as guides.
3. See Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for air cleaner
service procedures.
Installation
IMPORTANT: Any leaks in the air filter system will
allow dirt into engine and will cause serious engine
damage. Make sure that all air cleaner components
are in good condition and are properly secured during reassembly.
1. Reassemble air cleaner system using Figures 4 and
5 as guides. Make sure that vacuator valve is pointed
down after assembly.
Diesel Engine
4
3
Figure 5
1. Bracket
2. Cover
3. Vacuator valve
Page 4 − 6
4. Pipe nipple
5. Indicator
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Diesel
Engine
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Page 4 − 7
Diesel Engine
Radiator
9
10
4
32
4
11
9
12
3
8
2
31
33
6
4
12
11
7
5
5
1
13
9
24
4
30
27
14
29
25
18
28
21
26
24
4
5
6
15
15
16
17
8
3
RIGHT
22
19
FRONT
20
23
21
Figure 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Radiator/oil cooler assembly
Radiator cap
Hose clamp
Flat washer
Lock nut
Hose clamp
Upper radiator hose
Foam seal
Cap screw
Coolant reservoir
Hose
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Hose clamp
Fan shroud
Lower radiator hose
Pop rivet
Radiator draincock
Hydraulic hose
Back washer
Vent hose
Vent tube
Flange nut
Clamp (2 used)
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
Carriage screw (4 used)
Flange head screw
Hood latch
Flange nut
Radiator support
Grommet (2 used)
Radiator shield
Hydraulic hose
Lock nut (2 used)
Latch (2 used)
Screen
Removal (Fig. 6)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
2. Raise the hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
CAUTION
Do not open radiator cap or drain coolant if the
radiator or engine is hot. Pressurized, hot coolant can escape and cause burns.
Ethylene−glycol antifreeze is poisonous. Dispose of coolant properly, or store it in a properly
labeled container away from children and pets.
Diesel Engine
Page 4 − 8
Groundsmaster 3280−D
3. Drain coolant from radiator.
A. Slowly remove radiator cap from the radiator.
B. Place drain pan below the radiator drain plug located on the bottom of the radiator. Loosen draincock and allow coolant to drain from radiator.
4. Remove screen from machine (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
3. Carefully position radiator assembly to the radiator
support. Secure radiator with six (6) flange head screws
and flange nuts.
4. Position fan shroud to the radiator. Secure fan
shroud to radiator with four (4) cap screws, flat washers
and lock nuts. Make sure that a minimum of .250” (6.4
mm) clearance exists at all points between shroud and
fan.
5. Route hydraulic hoses through grommets in lower
radiator shield. Lubricate new o−rings and connect
hoses to oil cooler.
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all
hydraulic controls to relieve system pressure
and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
5. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from oil cooler. Locate
and discard o−rings. Route hoses out of grommets in
lower radiator shield.
6. Disconnect radiator hoses (upper and lower) from
the radiator.
7. Loosen hose clamp and remove overflow hose from
radiator fill opening.
6. Connect upper and lower radiator hoses and secure
with clamps.
7. Connect overflow hose to radiator fill opening and
secure with hose clamp.
8. Make sure radiator drain plug is tight. Fill radiator
with coolant (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
9. Install screen to machine (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
10.Lower hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
1
8. Remove four (4) cap screws, flat washers and lock
nuts that secure fan shroud to radiator. Position fan
shroud away from the radiator.
2
9. Support the radiator assembly before loosening
mounting fasteners.
5
10.Remove six (6) flange head screws and flange nuts
that secure radiator to radiator support.
6
4
11. Carefully pull radiator assembly from the machine.
Plug radiator and hose openings to prevent contamination.
5
6
3
4
12.As required, remove radiator shield and oil cooler
from radiator using Figures 6 and 7 as guides.
7
Installation (Fig. 6)
1. If removed, install radiator shield and oil cooler to radiator using Figures 6 and 7 as guides.
2. Remove any plugs placed during the removal procedure.
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Figure 7
1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 4 − 9
Radiator
Oil cooler
Hydraulic hose
O−ring
5. Lock washer
6. Hex nut
7. Hydraulic hose
Diesel Engine
Diesel
Engine
CAUTION
Engine
28
29
30
31
27
32
33
26
26
34
14
50 to 60 ft−lb
(68 to 81 N−m)
13
25
+
35
−
24
21
38
22
37
20
15
16 14
13
19
18
39
1
12
17
36
5
23
41
40
11
50 to 60 ft−lb
(68 to 81 N−m)
7
40
10
2
3
RIGHT
4
3
6
4
FRONT
5
8
9
6
Figure 8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Diesel engine
Engine mount bracket
Spacer (4 used)
Rebound washer (4 used)
Lock washer
Cap screw (4 used)
Engine shock mount (red patch)
Engine mount bracket
Lock nut (2 used per mount)
Engine shock mount (3 used)
Engine mount bracket
Cap screw (2 used per mount)
Cap screw (2 used per bracket)
Lock washer (2 used per bracket)
Diesel Engine
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Cap screw (2 used per coupling)
Coupling spacer (2 used per coupling)
Lock nut (2 used per coupling)
Drive shaft
Cap screw (2 used per coupling)
Lock washer (2 used per coupling)
Flat washer (2 used per coupling)
Rubber coupling
Spacer (2 used per coupling)
Flat washer (3 used)
Lock nut (3 used)
Hose clamp
Air inlet hose
Cap screw (2 used)
Page 4 − 10
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
Air cleaner bracket
Air cleaner assembly
Flat washer (2 used)
Lock nut (2 used)
Air inlet hose
Battery
Cap screw
Flat washer
Battery retainer
Cap screw (3 used)
Battery base
Flange nut (3 used)
R−clamp
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Removal (Fig. 8)
4
6
3
2
4
2. Open hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
6
4
7
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine and remove key from the
ignition switch. Chock wheels to keep the machine from
moving.
5
5
3. Disconnect negative (−) and then positive (+) battery
cables at the battery.
8
1
4. Remove battery from machine (see Battery Service
in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 6 − Electrical System).
CAUTION
Figure 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Radiator
Hose clamp
Overflow hose
Flat washer
5.
6.
7.
8.
Do not open radiator cap or drain coolant if the
radiator or engine is hot. Pressurized, hot coolant can escape and cause burns.
Lock nut
Cap screw
Coolant reservoir
Fan shroud
2
Diesel
Engine
5. Remove cap screws and flange nuts that secure battery base to brackets. Remove battery base from machine.
Ethylene−glycol antifreeze is poisonous. Dispose of coolant properly, or store it in a properly
labeled container away from children and pets.
1
6. Drain coolant from radiator (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
7. Loosen hose clamp and remove overflow hose from
radiator fill opening (Fig. 9). Remove coolant reservoir
from radiator fan shroud.
Figure 10
1. Cable end
2. Cable clamp
8. Remove four (4) cap screws, flat washers and lock
nuts that secure fan shroud to radiator (Fig. 9). Position
fan shroud away from the radiator.
9. Remove P.T.O. shaft from machine (see P.T.O. Shaft
Removal in Service and Repairs section of Chapter 9 −
P.T.O. System).
2
1
10.Remove air cleaner (see Air Cleaner Removal in this
section).
11. Remove throttle cable from injector pump (Fig. 10):
A. Remove retaining ring that secures throttle cable
end to injector pump control arm.
B. Loosen throttle cable clamp and remove throttle
cable from the injector pump.
C. Position throttle cable away from the engine.
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Figure 11
1. Fuel return hose
Page 4 − 11
2. Fuel supply hose
Diesel Engine
12.Disconnect hoses from engine:
CAUTION
A. Loosen clamps and disconnect upper and lower
radiator hoses from the engine.
B. At injector pump, loosen hose clamps and disconnect supply and return fuel hoses from the pump
fittings (Fig. 10). Plug hoses to prevent leakage and
contamination.
13.Disconnect transmission drive shaft from engine
(see Hydraulic Transmission Drive Shaft Removal in the
Service and Repairs section of Chapter 5 − Hydraulic
System).
14.Remove cotter pin and clevis pin that secure hood
cable to muffler bracket. Support hood in the open position.
One person should operate lift or hoist while the
other person guides the engine out of the machine.
IMPORTANT: Make sure not to damage the engine,
fuel hoses, hydraulic lines, electrical harness or
other parts while removing the engine.
D. Raise engine and remove from machine.
17.If necessary, remove engine brackets from engine
(Fig. 12 and 13).
15.Disconnect wire harness connectors from the following engine components:
NOTE: Label all electrical leads for reassembly purposes.
1
A. Alternator connector and stud.
B. Oil pressure switch located near the engine oil filter.
C. Connector, fusible link connector and positive
battery cable from the starter motor.
3
2
4
Figure 12
1. Front engine bracket
2. Cap screw
E. Fuel stop solenoid on injector pump.
2
3
D. High temperature shut down switch and temperature sender located on the water pump housing.
3. Lock washer
4. Rear engine bracket
F. Negative battery cable from injector pump.
30 to 35 ft−lb
(41 to 47 N−m)
G. Glow plug strip.
H. P.T.O. clutch wire connector.
7
16.Remove engine from machine:
A. Attach short section of chain between lift tabs located on each end of the cylinder head.
1
B. Connect a hoist or chain fall at the center of the
short section of chain. Apply enough tension on the
short chain so that the engine will be supported.
5
6
2
C. Remove fasteners that secure the engine (with
brackets) to the engine shock mounts and engine
mount brackets.
Loctite #242
4
5
Figure 13
1.
2.
3.
4.
Diesel Engine
3
Page 4 − 12
Socket hd screw (3 used)
Drive adapter
Diesel engine
Engine bracket
5. Lock washer
6. Cap screw
7. Engine bracket
Groundsmaster 3280−D
8. Install clevis pin and cotter pin to secure hood cable
to muffler bracket.
1. Locate machine on a level surface with cutting deck
(or implement) lowered and key removed from the ignition switch. Chock wheels to keep the machine from
moving.
2. Make sure that all parts removed from the engine
during maintenance or rebuilding are reinstalled to the
engine.
9. Connect transmission drive shaft to engine pulley
(see Hydraulic Transmission Drive Shaft Installation in
the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 5 − Hydraulic System).
10.Connect all wire harness connectors to engine components.
3. If drive adapter was removed from crankshaft pulley
(Fig. 13), apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads
of socket head screws. Secure adapter to pulley with
three (3) socket head screws. Torque screws from 30 to
35 ft−lb (41 to 47 N−m).
11. Remove plugs installed in hoses during disassembly. Connect hoses to the engine:
4. If engine brackets were removed from the engine,
reinstall them to engine (Fig. 12 and 13).
B. Connect upper and lower radiator hoses to the
engine. Secure with hose clamps.
5. If engine mount brackets (items 2 and 11) were removed from frame, secure them to frame with cap
screws and lock washers. Torque screws from 50 to 60
ft−lb (68 to 81 N−m).
IMPORTANT: The left, rear shock mount (item 7) is
different than the other three mounts (item 10). If
shock mounts were removed from engine mount
brackets on frame, make sure that shock mount
with red patch is correctly installed at left, rear position.
6. Position fan shroud around the engine fan.
A. Connect supply and return fuel hoses to injector
pump fittings (Fig. 10). Secure with hose clamps.
12.Connect throttle cable to injector pump (Fig. 10):
A. Route throttle cable to injector pump on engine.
B. Install the throttle cable end into the lowest hole
on the injector pump control arm. Secure cable end
with retaining ring.
C. Position cable under cable clamp.
D. Adjust throttle control (see Adjust Throttle Control in the Adjustments section of this chapter).
13.Install air cleaner (see Air Cleaner Installation in this
section).
7. Reinstall engine to machine.
A. Attach short section of chain between lift tabs located on each end of the cylinder head
B. Connect a hoist or chain fall at the center of the
short section of chain. Apply enough tension on the
short chain so that the engine can be supported.
CAUTION
One person should operate lift or hoist while the
other person guides the engine into the machine.
IMPORTANT: Make sure not to damage the engine,
fuel hoses, hydraulic lines, electrical harness or
other parts while installing the engine.
C. Lower engine to the machine frame. Make sure
fastener holes of the engine brackets are aligned
with the holes in the engine shock mounts.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that clutch pulley and
P.T.O. pulley are aligned during P.T.O. shaft installation.
14.Install P.T.O. shaft to machine (see P.T.O. Shaft
Installation in Service and Repairs section of Chapter 9
− P.T.O. System).
15.Position fan shroud to radiator. Make sure that a
minimum of .250” (6.4 mm) clearance exists at all points
between shroud and fan. Secure fan shroud to radiator
with four (4) cap screws, flat washers and lock nuts (Fig.
9).
16.Install coolant reservoir to bracket on radiator fan
shroud (Fig. 9). Install overflow hose to radiator fill opening and secure with hose clamp.
17.Add coolant to radiator (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
NOTE: Make sure to attach R−clamp as battery base
is installed.
D. Secure engine to the engine mounts.
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Page 4 − 13
Diesel Engine
Diesel
Engine
Installation (Fig. 11)
18.Position battery base to brackets and secure with
cap screws and flange nuts.
21.Connect positive (+) and then negative (−) battery
cables to the battery.
19.Install battery to machine (see Battery Service in the
Service and Repairs section of Chapter 6 − Electrical
System).
22.Bleed fuel system (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
23.Close hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
20.Check engine oil level (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
Diesel Engine
Page 4 − 14
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Chapter 5
Hydraulic System
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Hydraulic Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Hydraulic Fitting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Towing Traction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Check Hydraulic Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
HYDRAULIC FLOW DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Traction Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Lift Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Steering Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Hydraulic Pressure Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Hydraulic Tester (Pressure and Flow) . . . . . . . . . 14
Hydraulic Test Fitting Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
O--Ring Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Charge Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Implement Relief Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lift Cylinder Internal Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Steering Cylinder Internal Leakage Test . . . . . . . 24
Charge Pump Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Traction Pedal Friction Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
General Precautions for Removing and Installing
Hydraulic System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Check Hydraulic Lines and Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Flush Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Hydraulic System Start--up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Transmission Drive Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Hydrostatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Hydrostatic Transmission Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Hydrostatic Transmission Neutral Arm
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Lift Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Steering Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Steering Control Valve Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Steering Cylinder (2 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Steering Cylinder Service (2 Wheel Drive) . . . . . 48
Steering Cylinder (4 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Steering Cylinder Service (4 Wheel Drive) . . . . . 52
Lift Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Lift Control Valve Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Counterbalance Valve Manifold (If Equipped) . . 58
Oil Cooler (Groundsmaster 3280--D) . . . . . . . . . . 60
SAUER--DANFOSS (SUNDSTRAND) 15 SERIES REPAIR MANUAL
SAUER--DANFOSS (SUNDSTRAND) 15 SERIES
SERVICE MANUAL
SAUER--DANFOSS STEERING UNIT TYPE OSPM
SERVICE MANUAL
Page 5 -- 1 Rev. A
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
Table of Contents
Specifications
Item
Description
Hydrostatic Transmission
Sauer Danfoss (Sundstrand),
U--type, Axial Piston Design, Model Series 15
.9 Cubic Inches (15 cc)
.9 Cubic Inches (15 cc)
Pump Maximum Displacement (per revolution)
Motor Displacement (per revolution)
Charge Pump
Displacement (per revolution)
Gerotor Pump in Hydrostat
.3 Cubic Inches (4.9 cc)
Implement (Lift/Steering) Relief Pressure
700 to 1000 PSI (48.2 to 69.0 Bar)
Steering Valve
Sauer Danfoss Steering Unit, Type OSPM
Lift Control Valve
Spool Type Directional Control Valve
with Adjustable Counterbalance Valve
Counterbalance Pressure
See Traction Unit Operator’s Manual
Hydraulic Filter
25 Micron Spin--on Cartridge Type
Hydraulic Oil
See Traction Unit Operator’s Manual
Hydraulic Reservoir (Front Axle) Capacity
Hydraulic System
6 Qts. U.S. (5.7 L)
Page 5 -- 2
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
General Information
Hydraulic Hoses
Hydraulic hoses are subject to extreme conditions such
as pressure differentials during operation and exposure
to weather, sun, chemicals, very warm storage conditions or mishandling during operation and maintenance.
These conditions can cause damage or premature deterioration. Some hoses are more susceptible to these
conditions than others. Inspect the hoses frequently for
signs of deterioration or damage.
When replacing a hydraulic hose, be sure that the hose
is straight (not twisted) before tightening the fittings.
This can be done by observing the imprint on the hose.
Use two wrenches; hold the hose straight with one
wrench and tighten the hose swivel nut onto the fitting
with the other wrench.
WARNING
Before disconnecting or performing any work
on hydraulic system, relieve all pressure in
system. Stop engine; lower or support all attachment(s).
Keep body and hands away from pin hole leaks
or nozzles that eject hydraulic fluid under high
pressure. Use paper or cardboard, not hands,
to search for leaks. Hydraulic fluid escaping
under pressure can have sufficient force to
penetrate the skin and cause serious injury. If
fluid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a doctor
familiar with this type of injury. Gangrene may
result from such an injury.
Hydraulic Fitting Installation
Nut
1. Make sure both threads and sealing surfaces are
free of burrs, nicks, scratches or any foreign material.
Body
Sleeve
2. Make sure the o--ring is installed and properly seated
in the groove. It is recommended that the o--ring be replaced any time the connection is opened.
Seal
3. Lubricate the o--ring with a light coating of oil.
4. Put the tube and nut squarely into position on the
face seal end of the fitting and tighten the nut until finger
tight.
Figure 1
5. Mark the nut and fitting body. Hold the body with a
wrench. Use another wrench to tighten the nut to the correct Flats From Finger Tight (F.F.F.T.). The markings on
the nut and fitting body will verify that the connection has
been tightened.
Size
4 (1/4 in. nominal hose or tubing)
6 (3/8 in.)
8 (1/2 in.)
10 (5/8 in.)
12 (3/4 in.)
16 (1 in.)
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Final
Position
Mark Nut
and Body
F.F.F.T.
0.75 + 0.25
0.75 + 0.25
0.75 + 0.25
1.00 + 0.25
0.75 + 0.25
0.75 + 0.25
Extend Line
Finger Tight
Initial
Position
After Proper Tightening
Figure 2
Page 5 -- 3 Rev. A
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
O--Ring Face Seal
SAE Straight Thread O--Ring Port -- Non--adjustable
1. Make sure both threads and sealing surfaces are
free of burrs, nicks, scratches or any foreign material.
2. Always replace the o--ring seal when this type of fitting shows signs of leakage.
O--Ring
3. Lubricate the o--ring with a light coating of oil.
4. Install the fitting into the port and tighten it down full
length until finger tight.
Figure 3
5. Tighten the fitting to the correct Flats From Finger
Tight (F.F.F.T.).
Size
4 (1/4 in. nominal hose or tubing)
6 (3/8 in.)
8 (1/2 in.)
10 (5/8 in.)
12 (3/4 in.)
16 (1 in.)
F.F.F.T.
1.00 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
SAE Straight Thread O--Ring Port -- Adjustable
1. Make sure both threads and sealing surfaces are
free of burrs, nicks, scratches or any foreign material.
2. Always replace the o--ring seal when this type of fitting shows signs of leakage.
Lock Nut
3. Lubricate the o--ring with a light coating of oil.
4. Turn back the jam nut as far as possible. Make sure
the back up washer is not loose and is pushed up as far
as possible (Step 1).
Back--up Washer
O--Ring
5. Install the fitting into the port and tighten finger tight
until the washer contacts the face of the port (Step 2).
6. To put the fitting in the desired position, unscrew it by
the required amount, but no more than one full turn
(Step 3).
Figure 4
Step 1
Step 3
Step 2
Step 4
7. Hold the fitting in the desired position with a wrench
and turn the jam nut with another wrench to the correct
Flats From Finger Tight (F.F.F.T.) (Step 4).
Size
4 (1/4 in. nominal hose or tubing)
6 (3/8 in.)
8 (1/2 in.)
10 (5/8 in.)
12 (3/4 in.)
16 (1 in.)
Hydraulic System
F.F.F.T.
1.00 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
1.50 + 0.25
Figure 5
Page 5 -- 4 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Towing Traction Unit
IMPORTANT: If towing limits are exceeded, severe
damage to the transmission may occur.
If it becomes necessary to tow (or push) the machine,
tow (or push) at a speed below 3 mph (4.8 kph), and for
a very short distance. If machine needs to be moved a
considerable distance, machine should be transported
on a trailer. The transmission is equipped with two check
valves that need to be pressed for towing or pushing
(Fig. 6). See Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for Towing
Procedures.
1
1
Figure 6
1. Check valve location
Check Hydraulic Fluid
The Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320 hydraulic system is
designed to operate on high quality hydraulic fluid. The
front axle housing acts as the hydraulic system reservoir
and it holds approximately 6 quarts (5.7 liters) of hydraulic fluid. Check level of hydraulic fluid daily. See Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for fluid level checking
procedure and hydraulic oil recommendations.
Figure 7
1. Hydraulic reservoir dipstick
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 5 Rev. A
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
1
HYDROSTATIC
TRANSMISSION
& CHARGE PUMP
Hydraulic System
STEERING
VALVE
700 -- 1000
PSI
Page 5 -- 6
Rev. A
L
E T
STEERING
CYLINDER
R
P
.3 CU IN/REV
3.5 GAL/MIN
OIL
COOLER
T
TEST
PORT
B
Groundsmaster 3280--D (SN Below 270000400)
Groundsmaster 3320 (SN Below 280000000)
Hydraulic Schematic
LIFT
VALVE
P
LIFT
CYLINDERS
Hydraulic Schematics
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 7 Rev. A
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
Groundsmaster 3280--D (SN Above 270000400)
Groundsmaster 3320 (SN Above 280000000)
Hydraulic Schematic
HYDROSTATIC
TRANSMISSION
& CHARGE PUMP
Hydraulic System
STEERING
VALVE
700 -- 1000
PSI
Figure 8
Page 5 -- 8 Rev. A
L
E T
STEERING
CYLINDER
R
P
.3 CU IN/REV
3.5 GAL/MIN
OIL
COOLER
LIFT
VALVE
T
TEST
PORT
Working Pressure
Low Pressure (Charge)
Return or Suction
Flow
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Traction Circuit
P
LIFT
CYLINDERS
B
Hydraulic Flow Diagrams
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Traction Circuit
Reverse Direction
The hydrostatic transmission input shaft is rotated by a
drive shaft off the front of the engine crankshaft. Pushing
the top of the traction pedal rotates the variable displacement pump swash plate in the transmission to
create a flow of oil. This oil is directed to the fixed displacement motor in the transmission which turns the
front axle input shaft to drive the front wheels in the forward direction.
The traction circuit operates essentially the same in reverse as it does in the forward direction. However, the
flow through the circuit is reversed. Pushing the bottom
of the traction pedal rotates the variable displacement
pump swash plate in the transmission to create a flow of
oil. This oil is directed to the fixed displacement motor in
the transmission which turns the differential input shaft
to drive the front wheels in a reverse direction.
Oil flowing from the motor returns to the variable displacement pump and is continuously pumped through
the closed traction circuit as long as the traction pedal
is pushed.
Oil flowing from the motor returns to the variable displacement pump and is continuously pumped through
the closed traction circuit as long as the traction pedal
is pushed.
A gerotor charge pump in the hydrostat provides a
constant supply of charge oil to the closed loop traction
circuit for lubrication and to make up for oil that is lost
due to internal leakage in the transmission pump and
motor. The charge pump takes its suction through a filter
from the reservoir (front axle). Charge pump flow is directed to the low pressure side of the closed loop circuit.
Charge pressure is limited by backpressure created by
the lift control valve. Charge pressure can be monitored
at the transmission charge pump test port. Charge
pump flow in excess of traction circuit charge needs provides hydraulic flow for the steering and lift circuits.
The charge circuit functions the same in reverse as it
does in the forward direction.
Hydraulic
System
Forward Direction (Fig. 8)
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 9
Hydraulic System
Figure 9
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 10 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
HYDROSTATIC
TRANSMISSION
& CHARGE PUMP
STEERING
VALVE
700 -- 1000
PSI
L
E T
STEERING
CYLINDER
R
P
.3 CU IN/REV
3.5 GAL/MIN
OIL
COOLER
LIFT
VALVE
T
TEST
PORT
Working Pressure
Low Pressure (Charge)
Return or Suction
Flow
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Lift Circuit (Raise)
LIFT CONTROL LEVER
IN RAISE POSITION
P
LIFT
CYLINDERS
(EXTENDING)
B
Lift Circuit
During conditions of not steering or raising/lowering the
cutting deck (or implement), flow from the charge pump
goes to the lift control valve and is by--passed through
the oil cooler and then to the reservoir (front axle).
Raise Cutting Deck (Or Implement) (Fig. 9)
When the cutting deck (or implement) is to be raised, the
control valve spool is positioned back and flow is directed out the B port of the control valve to the cylinder
(upper) end of the lift cylinders. Hydraulic pressure
against the cylinder pistons extends the lift cylinders. At
the same time, the pistons push the hydraulic fluid in the
lower portion of the lift cylinders out and to the reservoir
(front axle). The extending lift cylinders cause the cutting deck (or implement) to raise.
When the cutting deck (or implement) is to be lowered,
the control valve spool is moved forward causing the pilot valve to shift. This shifted valve allows a return path
from the lift cylinders to the reservoir (front axle) (Fig.
10). The weight of the cutting deck (or implement)
causes the cylinders to retract thus lowering the cutting
deck (or implement). As the cylinders retract, the pistons
draw hydraulic fluid from the reservoir (front axle) into
the lower portion of the lift cylinders.
When the control valve lever is released, the lift control
spool returns to the center position and causes the pilot
valve to shift. Oil flow by--passes to the reservoir (front
axle) and lift cylinder movement is stopped.
Counterbalance
An adjustable counterbalance valve allows cutting unit
weight transfer to the machine to improve traction. On
early production machines, the counterbalance valve is
incorporated in the lift control valve. Later production
machines have a separate counterbalance manifold.
Changes in traction conditions (e.g. moving up an incline) will cause a valve shift to slightly lift or lower the
cutting deck to alter weight transfer. Counterbalance
pressure settings are dependant on the cutting deck
used on a machine. Refer to Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual for counterbalance pressure recommendations.
B
When the control valve lever is released, spring action
returns the lift control spool to the center position and
by--passes flow back to the reservoir (front axle). Lift cylinder movement is stopped.
Lower Cutting Deck (Or Implement) (Fig. 10)
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Figure 10
Page 5 -- 11 Rev. A
LIFT CONTROL LEVER
IN LOWER POSITION
TO RESERVOIR
TO HYDROSTAT
OIL
COOLER
LIFT
VALVE
FROM STEERING
VALVE
P
LIFT
CYLINDERS
(RETRACTING)
TEST
PORT
T
LIFT CIRCUIT (LOWER)
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
The hydrostatic transmission charge pump supplies
charge oil for the closed loop traction circuit in addition
to supplying flow for the steering circuit and the cutting
deck (or implement) lift circuit. The charge pump takes
its suction through a filter from the reservoir (front axle).
Pump output flows to the steering control valve before
reaching the lift valve so the steering circuit has priority.
Lift circuit pressure is limited from 700 to 1000 PSI by the
implement relief valve located in the hydrostat.
Steering Circuit
The charge pump in the hydrostat supplies flow for the
steering circuit and for the cutting deck (or implement)
lift circuit. Pump output flows to the steering control
valve before reaching the lift valve so the steering circuit
has priority. Steering circuit pressure is limited from 700
to 1000 PSI by the implement relief valve located in the
hydrostat.
out the L port. Pressure retracts the steering cylinder for
a left turn. The rotary meter ensures that the oil flow to
the cylinder is proportional to the amount of the turning
on the steering wheel. Fluid leaving the steering cylinder
flows back through the spool valve, then out the T port
and returns to the hydraulic reservoir (front axle).
When the steering wheel is not being turned and the engine is running (hydrostat input shaft being rotated),
charge pump flow enters the steering control valve at
the P port and by--passes the rotary meter and steering
cylinder. Flow leaves the steering control valve through
the E port and is directed to the lift control valve.
Right Turn (Fig. 11)
Left Turn (Fig. 11)
When a left turn is made with the engine running, the
turning of the steering wheel positions the steering control spool valve so that flow goes through the bottom of
the spool. Flow entering the steering control valve at the
P port passes through the rotary meter and is directed
When a right turn is made with the engine running, the
turning of the steering wheel positions the steering control spool valve so that flow goes through the top of the
spool. Flow entering the steering control valve at the P
port passes through the rotary meter and is directed out
port R. Pressure extends the steering cylinder for a right
turn. The rotary meter ensures that the oil flow to the cylinder is proportional to the amount of the turning on the
steering wheel. Fluid leaving the cylinder flows back
through the spool valve, then out the T port and to the
hydraulic reservoir (front axle).
RIGHT TURN
PISTON MOVEMENT
STEERING CYLINDER
L
R
STEERING
VALVE
P
E
T
TO RESERVOIR
FROM HYDROSTAT
R
STEERING CYLINDER
L
T
P
STEERING
VALVE
FROM HYDROSTAT
E
TO RESERVOIR
PISTON MOVEMENT
LEFT TURN
Figure 11
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 12
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Hydraulic
System
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 13
Hydraulic System
Special Tools
Order these tools from your Toro Distributor.
Hydraulic Pressure Test Kit
Toro Part Number: TOR47009
Use to take various pressure readings for diagnostic
tests. Quick disconnect fittings provided attach directly
to mating fittings on machine test ports without tools. A
high pressure hose is provided for remote readings.
Contains one each: 1000 PSI (70 Bar), 5000 PSI (350
Bar) and 10000 PSI (700 Bar) gauges. Use gauges as
recommended in Testing section of this chapter.
Figure 12
Hydraulic Tester (Pressure and Flow)
Toro Part Number: TOR214678
This tester requires o--ring Face Seal (ORFS) adapter
fittings for use on this machine.
1. INLET HOSE: Hose connected from the system circuit to the inlet side of the hydraulic tester.
2. LOAD VALVE: A simulated working load is created
in the circuit by turning the valve to restrict flow.
3. LOW PRESSURE GAUGE: Low range gauge to provide accurate reading at low pressure: 0 to 1000 PSI.
A protector valve cuts out when pressure is about to
exceed the normal range for the gauge. The cutout
pressure is adjustable.
Figure 13
4. HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE: High range gauge
which accommodates pressures beyond the capacity of
the low pressure gauge: 0 to 5000 PSI.
5. FLOW METER: This meter measures actual oil flow
in the operating circuit with a gauge rated at 15 GPM.
6. OUTLET HOSE: A hose from the outlet side of the
hydraulic tester connects to the hydraulic system circuit.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 14 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Hydraulic Test Fitting Kit
Toro Part Number: TOR4079
This kit includes a variety of o--ring Face Seal fittings to
enable connection of test gauges to the system.
The kit includes: tee’s, unions, reducers, plugs, caps,
and male test fittings.
Figure 14
O--Ring Kit
Toro Part Number: 16--3799
Hydraulic
System
The kit includes o--rings in a variety of sizes for face seal
and port seal hydraulic connections. It is recommended
that o--rings be replaced whenever a hydraulic connection is loosened.
Figure 15
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 15
Hydraulic System
Troubleshooting
The cause of an improperly functioning hydraulic system is best diagnosed with the use of proper testing
equipment and a thorough understanding of the complete hydraulic system.
A hydraulic system with an excessive increase in heat
or noise has a potential for failure. Should either of these
conditions be noticed, immediately stop the machine,
turn off the engine, locate the cause of the trouble, and
correct it before allowing the machine to be used again.
Continued use of an improperly functioning hydraulic
system could lead to extensive internal component
damage.
The charts that follow contain information to assist in
troubleshooting. There may possibly be more than one
cause for a machine malfunction.
Refer to the Testing section of this Chapter for precautions and specific test procedures.
Problem
Possible Cause
Hydraulic oil leaks
Fitting(s), hose(s) or tube(s) is (are) loose or damaged.
O--ring(s) or seal(s) is (are) missing or damaged.
Foaming hydraulic fluid
Oil level in reservoir (front axle) is low.
Hydraulic system has wrong kind of oil.
Pump suction line has an air leak.
Hydraulic system operates hot
Traction system pressure is high due to excessive load or brakes
applied.
Oil level in reservoir (front axle) is low.
Oil is contaminated or too light.
Engine speed is too low.
Oil cooler is damaged or plugged. Air flow through oil cooler is obstructed.
Oil filter is plugged.
Charge pressure is low.
Hydrostat check valve is not seating or is damaged.
Hydrostat is worn or damaged.
Traction jerky when starting
Friction wheel on traction pedal out of adjustment or worn.
Traction control linkage is misadjusted, disconnected, binding or
damaged.
Hydrostat check valve is not seating or is damaged.
Neutral is difficult to find or unit operates in one direction only
Traction control linkage is misadjusted, disconnected, binding or
damaged.
Hydrostat check valve is not seating or is damaged.
Hydrostat is worn or damaged.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 16
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Problem
Possible Cause
Traction response is sluggish
Charge pressure is low.
Hydraulic oil is very cold.
Hydrostat check valve is not seating or is damaged.
Brakes are not released.
Hydrostat is worn or damaged.
No traction in either direction
Brakes are not released.
Oil level in reservoir (front axle) is low.
Hydrostat check valve is not seating or is damaged.
Charge pressure is low.
Transmission drive shaft or key damaged (steering and lift circuits
affected as well).
Hydrostat is worn or damaged.
Front axle is damaged.
Cutting deck (or implement) will not
lift or lifts slowly
Engine speed is too low.
Cutting deck has excessive debris buildup in cutting chambers.
Lift arm(s) is (are) binding.
Hydraulic
System
Lift valve control linkage is binding or broken.
Lift cylinder(s) is (are) binding.
Reservoir (front axle) oil level is low.
Charge pump pressure or flow is insufficient.
Implement relief valve is stuck or damaged (Note: steering circuit
also affected).
Lift control valve is damaged.
Lift cylinder leaks internally.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 17
Hydraulic System
Problem
Possible Cause
Cutting deck (or implement) raises,
but will not stay up
Lift cylinder leaks internally.
Steering inoperative or sluggish
Engine speed is too low.
Lift control valve leaks.
Reservoir (front axle) oil level is low.
Steering components (e.g. tie rods, steering cylinder ends) worn or
binding.
Steering cylinder is binding.
Implement relief valve stuck or damaged (Note: lift circuit also affected).
Steering control valve is worn or damaged.
Steering cylinder leaks internally.
Charge pump flow or pressure is low (Note: Low charge pump flow
or pressure will also affect the lift circuit).
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 18
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Testing
The most effective method for isolating problems in the
hydraulic system is by using hydraulic test equipment
such as pressure gauges and flow meters in the circuits
during various operational checks (See Special Tools
section in this Chapter).
2. Put caps or plugs on any hydraulic lines left open or
exposed during testing or removal of components.
CAUTION
Failure to use gauges with recommended pressure (psi) rating as listed in test procedures
could result in damage to gauge and possible
personal injury from leaking hot oil.
Before Performing Hydraulic Tests
All obvious areas such as oil supply, filter, binding linkage, loose fasteners or improper adjustments must be
checked before assuming that a hydraulic component is
the source of the problem being experienced.
Precautions For Hydraulic Testing
3. The engine must be in good operating condition. Use
a tachometer when making a hydraulic test. Engine
speed will affect the accuracy of the hydraulic test readings.
4. To prevent damage to tester or components, the inlet
and the outlet hoses must be properly connected, and
not reversed (when using tester with pressure and flow
capabilities).
5. To minimize the possibility of damaging components, completely open load valve in hydraulic tester
(when using tester with pressure and flow capabilities).
Before disconnecting or performing any work
on the hydraulic system, all pressure in the
system must be relieved by stopping the engine
and lowering or supporting the cutting deck or
other implement.
Keep body and hands away from pin hole leaks
or nozzles that eject hydraulic fluid under high
pressure. Use paper or cardboard, not hands, to
search for leaks. Hydraulic fluid escaping under
pressure can have sufficient force to penetrate
skin and cause serious injury. If fluid is injected
into the skin, it must be surgically removed
within a few hours by a doctor familiar with this
type of injury. Gangrene may result from such
an injury.
7. Position the tester hoses so that rotating machine
parts will not make contact with them and result in hose
or tester damage.
8. Check and adjust the oil level in the reservoir (front
axle) after connecting hydraulic test equipment.
9. Check the control linkage for improper adjustment,
binding or broken parts.
10.All hydraulic tests should be made with the hydraulic
oil at normal operating temperature.
11. After testing is completed, check oil level in reservoir
(front axle) and adjust if necessary. Also, make sure that
no leakage from hydraulic components exist.
Page 5 -- 19
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
6. Install fittings finger tight, far enough to insure that
they are not cross--threaded, before tightening with a
wrench.
WARNING
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
1. Thoroughly clean the machine before disconnecting
or disassembling any hydraulic components. Always
keep in mind the need for cleanliness when working on
hydraulic equipment. Contamination will cause excessive wear of hydraulic components.
Charge Pressure Test (Using Pressure Gauge)
A charge pressure test should be performed to identify
if a worn or damaged hydrostatic transmission is causing a hydraulic system problem.
NOTE: Before conducting charge pressure test, determine counterbalance pressure setting for the machine
(see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
11. The pressure should drop no more than 15% from
initial test reading (Step 8 above). A pressure drop of
more than 15% may indicate a traction circuit leak (e.g.
check valve not seating, worn or damaged hydrostat).
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature.
If charge pressure drop is more than 15%, inspect the
condition of the charge pump gerotor and internal housing (See Charge Pump Service in the Sauer--Danfoss
(Sundstrand) 15 Series Service Manual at the end of this
chapter).
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting deck
(or implement) lowered and P.T.O. switch off. Make sure
engine is off. Set the parking brake and block the front
wheels to prevent machine movement.
If the charge pump is in good condition (no scoring,
scratches or excessive wear), the general condition of
the transmission’s piston pump and piston motor might
be suspected of wear and inefficiency.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing.
12.Disconnect pressure gauge from the transmission.
Install pipe plug back in the transmission. Check hydraulic oil level in reservoir (front axle).
CAUTION
3
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all
hydraulic controls to relieve system pressure
and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
4. Thoroughly clean the area around the 1/8 inch pipe
plug located on the top of the transmission between the
two check valves (Figs. 16 and 17). Remove the plug
from the transmission.
2
1
5. Connect a 1000 PSI (70 Bar) hydraulic pressure
gauge to the transmission opening.
6. After installing pressure gauge, start engine and run
at idle speed. Check for any hydraulic leakage from test
connections and correct before proceeding with test.
7. Run engine at full speed (3200 + 50 RPM). Use a
tachometer to verify that engine speed is correct.
2
Figure 16
1. Seat base opening
2. Check valve
3. Pipe plug
PIPE
PLUG
FRONT
8. Observe pressure gauge. The pressure reading
should be approximately the same as counterbalance
pressure.
9. Turn off machine. Record test results.
10.Perform a dynamic charge pressure test to identify
possible hydrostat (pump or motor) problems as follows:
A. With pressure gauge still connected, sit in the operator seat, start engine and press the traction pedal
to forward.
B. While machine is moving straight ahead on level
ground (no turning or deck lifting), monitor the pressure reading on the pressure guage. Record test results.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 20 Rev. A
Figure 17
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Implement Relief Pressure Test (Using Pressure Gauge)
The implement relief pressure test should be done if a
problem is suspected with the implement relief valve.
3
4
NOTE: When conducting the Implement Relief Pressure Test, use a 5000 PSI (350 Bar) Pressure Gauge.
1. Perform steps 1 through 8 of the Charge Pressure
Test (see Test No. 1 in this section). Make sure to use a
5000 PSI (350 Bar) Pressure Gauge.
2
1
Figure 18
1. Seat base opening
2. Check valve
3. Pipe plug
4. Implement relief valve
3. Move the lift control lever to the LOWER position to
lower the cutting deck (or implement) to the ground.
Shut off engine. Record test results.
NOTE: If the implement relief pressure is 700 to 1000
PSI (48.2 to 69.0 bar) and a steering or lift problem occurs, inspect for a problem unrelated to the hydraulic circuit (e.g. binding steering or lift system components,
debris build--up on/under the cutting deck). Check and
repair other items before continuing with hydraulic tests.
RELIEF
VALVE
FRONT
4. If the implement relief pressure is below 700 PSI
(48.2 bar), adjust the implement relief valve in the transmission by adding the required amount of shims from
the shim pack (see Implement Relief Valve in the Sauer-Danfoss (Sundstrand) 15 Series Service Manual at the
end of this chapter).
Hydraulic
System
2. With the engine running at 3200 RPM, move the lift
control lever to the RAISE position and allow the cutting
unit (or implement) to fully raise. Continue to hold the lever in the RAISE position and observe the pressure
gauge. The pressure reading should be from 700 to
1000 PSI (48.2 to 69.0 bar) as the implement relief valve
lifts.
2
Figure 19
NOTE: For every 0.010 in. (.254 mm) of shim thickness, there is an approximate 50 PSI (3.4 bar) change
in implement relief pressure.
If adding shims to the relief valve does not increase
pressure, inspect the condition of the charge pump gerotor and internal housing (See Charge Pump Service in
the Sauer--Danfoss (Sundstrand) 15 Series Service
Manual at the end of this chapter).
If the charge pump is in good condition (no scoring,
scratches or excessive wear), the general condition of
the transmission’s piston pump and piston motor might
be suspected of wear and inefficiency. A lack of minimum implement relief pressure could be due to the
charge pump having to direct all flow to the main traction
circuit (piston pump and piston motor).
5. Disconnect pressure gauge from the transmission.
Install pipe plug back in the transmission. Check hydraulic oil level in reservoir (front axle).
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 21 Rev. A
Hydraulic System
Lift Cylinder Internal Leakage Test
LOOK FOR LEAKAGE
HYDROSTATIC
TRANSMISSION
& CHARGE PUMP
700 -- 1000
PSI
LIFT
CYLINDERS
(FULLY
EXTENDED)
TEST
PORT
P
OIL
COOLER
STEERING
VALVE
P
E T
LIFT
VALVE
B
T
LIFT LEVER PULLED TO RAISE
R
L
STEERING
CYLINDER
Working Pressure
Low Pressure (Charge)
Return or Suction
Flow
Figure 20
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 22 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Procedure for Lift Cylinder Internal Leakage Test:
The lift cylinder internal leakage test should be performed if a cutting deck (or implement) raise and lower
problem is identified. This test will determine if the lift cylinders are faulty.
11. After testing is completed, remove the support from
the cutting deck (or implement). Start engine and operate lift cylinders through several up and down cycles.
Stop the engine and check for any leakage.
12.Check hydraulic oil level in reservoir (front axle).
NOTE: Cutting deck raise/lower circuit operation will be
affected by lift cylinder binding, extra weight on the cutting deck (or implement) and/or binding of lift components. Make sure that these items are checked before
proceeding with lift cylinder internal leakage test.
1
1. Park machine on a level surface with the P.T.O.
switch OFF. Set the parking brake and block the front
wheels to prevent machine movement.
2. With the engine running, raise the cutting deck (or
implement) completely. Using blocking or a hoist, support the cutting deck (or implement) to keep it in the fully
raised position. Turn engine OFF.
3. Place a drain pan under the lift cylinder that is to be
tested for internal leakage. Thoroughly clean the area
around the cylinder return hose at the bottom of the lift
cylinder.
2
Figure 21
1. Lift cylinder
2. Return hose
4. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the cylinder
return hose from the bottom of the lift cylinder (Fig. 21).
Leave the other end of the return hose connected to the
filter adapter on the transmission.
Hydraulic
System
5. Securely plug the open end of the disconnected lift
cylinder return hose to prevent hydraulic oil leakage or
suction of air by the transmission.
6. Remove all hydraulic oil from drain pan. Make sure
that empty drain pan remains under the open fitting of
the lift cylinder.
7. Start the engine and briefly hold the lift control lever
in the RAISE position to pressurize the lift cylinders.
Turn engine OFF.
8. Check to see if any oil has leaked into the drain pan
from the open fitting of the lift cylinder. If there is any oil
in the drain pan, the lift cylinder has internal leakage and
must be replaced (see Lift Cylinder in the Service and
Repairs section).
9. If the lift cylinder shows no sign of leakage, remove
the plug from the return hose and install the hose on the
lift cylinder fitting. Secure the hose by tightening the
hose clamp.
10.If needed, repeat steps 3 through 9 for the other lift
cylinder.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 23
Hydraulic System
Steering Cylinder Internal Leakage Test
FROM HYDROSTAT
STEERING
VALVE
P
R
TO RESERVOIR
E
T
STEERING WHEEL
TURNED FOR
RIGHT TURN
L
LOOK FOR LEAKAGE
STEERING CYLINDER
(FULLY EXTENDED)
Figure 22
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 24
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Procedure for Steering Cylinder Internal Leakage
Test:
4. Turn the steering wheel for a right turn (clockwise) so
the steering cylinder rod is fully extended.
The steering cylinder internal leakage test should be
performed if a steering problem is identified. This test
will determine if the steering cylinder is faulty.
5. Remove hydraulic hose from the fitting on the rod
end of the steering cylinder. Plug the end of the hose.
NOTE: Steering circuit operation will be affected by
rear tire pressure, steering cylinder binding, extra
weight on the vehicle and/or binding of rear axle steering
components. Make sure that these items are checked
before proceeding with steering cylinder internal leakage test.
6. With the engine off, continue turning the steering
wheel for a right turn (clockwise) with the steering cylinder fully extended. Observe the open fitting on the steering cylinder as the wheel is turned. If oil comes out of the
fitting while turning the steering wheel to the right, the
steering cylinder has internal leakage and must be repaired or replaced.
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature.
7. Remove plug from the hydraulic hose. Reconnect
hose to the steering cylinder fitting.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting deck
(or implement) lowered and P.T.O. switch off. Make sure
engine is off. Set the parking brake.
8. If a steering problem exists and the steering cylinder
tested acceptably, steering control valve requires service (see Steering Control Valve and Steering Control
Valve Service in the Service and Repairs section).
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing.
CAUTION
Hydraulic
System
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all
hydraulic controls to relieve system pressure
and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 25
Hydraulic System
Charge Pump Flow Test (Using Tester With Pressure Gauges and Flow Meter)
The charge pump flow test should be performed if a hydraulic problem is identified that affects both the steering
and lift circuits.
NOTE: The charge pump provides make--up oil for internal hydrostat components before flow is available for
the steering and lift circuits. Flow measured in this test
will be less than total charge pump output.
1. Make sure hydraulic oil is at normal operating temperature by operating the machine for approximately 10
minutes.
2. Park machine on a level surface with the cutting deck
(or implement) lowered and P.T.O. switch off. Make sure
engine is off. Set the parking brake and block the front
wheels to prevent machine movement.
IMPORTANT: The charge pump is a positive displacement pump. If the flow control valve on the
tester is fully closed, transmission damage can occur.
9. Watch tester pressure gauges carefully while slowly
closing the flow control valve until pressure gauge reads
500 PSI (34.5 bar).
10.Flow gauge reading should be at least 1 GPM (3.8
LPM).
11. Open flow control valve on tester and turn off engine.
Record results of hydraulic flow test.
12.If pressure of 500 PSI (34.5 bar) or flow of 1 GPM (3.8
LPM) could not be achieved, check the following:
A. Perform the charge pressure test (see Charge
Pressure Test in this section). Also, a dynamic
charge pressure test can be performed to identify if a
worn or damaged hydrostatic transmission exists.
3. Read Precautions For Hydraulic Testing.
CAUTION
Before opening hydraulic system, operate all
hydraulic controls to relieve system pressure
and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
4. Place a drain pan under the transmission. Thoroughly clean the area around the transmission charge pump
outlet (pressure) fitting (Fig. 23). Disconnect the hydraulic hose from the outlet fitting.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the oil flow indicator
arrow on the flow meter is showing that the oil will
flow from the pump, through the tester and to the
hydraulic hose.
B. Perform the implement relief pressure test (see
Implement Relief Pressure Test in this section).
C. Inspect the condition of the charge pump gerotor
and internal housing (See Charge Pump Service in
the Sauer--Danfoss (Sundstrand) 15 Series Service
Manual at the end of this chapter).
D. The general condition of the transmission’s piston pump and piston motor might be suspected of
wear and inefficiency.
13.Disconnect tester from the transmission and hydraulic hose. Reconnect hydraulic hose to the transmission
fitting. Check hydraulic oil level in reservoir (front axle).
5. Connect inlet hose of tester with pressure gauges
and flow meter to the transmission charge pump outlet
(pressure) fitting. Connect the tester outlet hose to the
hydraulic hose disconnected from the transmission fitting in step 5.
4
6. Make sure that the flow control valve on the tester is
fully open. Also, make sure that traction pedal and lift
valve are in neutral and that the parking brake is engaged.
2
1
7. Start engine and run at idle speed. Check for any hydraulic leakage from test connections and correct before proceeding with test.
8. Run engine at full speed (3200 + 50 RPM). Use a
tachometer to verify that engine speed is correct.
Hydraulic System
3
FRONT
Figure 23
1. Hydrostatic transmission
2. Hydraulic hose
Page 5 -- 26
3. O--ring
4. Outlet fitting
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Adjustments
Traction Pedal Friction Wheel
The traction pedal friction wheel is designed to reduce
transmission oscillation caused by rapid back and forth
foot movements against the traction pedal. This is most
noticeable when operating over bumpy terrain.
1
3
Occasionally inspect the friction wheel surface that contacts the traction pedal (Fig. 24). If the friction wheel is
worn flat at this point, the wheel should be rotated to restore contact with the pedal.
Adjustment (Fig. 25)
2
1. Loosen the flange nuts that secure the traction pedal
shaft to the machine frame.
2. Rotate the shaft to move the worn friction wheel section away from the traction pedal.
Figure 24
1. Traction pedal
2. Friction wheel
3. Inspection point
3. Tighten the flange nuts to secure traction pedal shaft
and friction wheel in position.
1
Hydraulic
System
2
2
3
4
Figure 25
1. Traction pedal
2. Flange nut
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 27
3. Traction pedal shaft
4. Friction wheel
Hydraulic System
Service and Repairs
General Precautions for Removing and Installing Hydraulic System Components
Before Repair or Replacement of Components
After Repair or Replacement of Components
1. Before removing any parts from the hydraulic system, park machine on a level surface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting deck (or implement) and stop engine. Remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Check oil level in the hydraulic reservoir (front axle)
and add correct oil if necessary (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual). Drain and refill hydraulic system reservoir (front axle), and change oil filter, if component
failure was severe or system is contaminated (see Flush
Hydraulic System in this section).
2. Clean machine before disconnecting, removing or
disassembling any hydraulic components. Make sure
hydraulic components, hose connections and fittings
are cleaned thoroughly. Always keep in mind the need
for cleanliness when working on hydraulic components.
CAUTION
Before loosening any hydraulic component, operate all hydraulic controls (traction pedal, steering wheel and lift control) to relieve system pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic
oil. Controls must be operated with the engine
OFF.
3. Put caps or plugs on any hydraulic lines, hydraulic fittings or components left open or exposed to prevent
contamination.
4. Put labels on disconnected hydraulic lines and
hoses for proper installation after repairs are completed.
5. Note the position of hydraulic fittings (especially elbow fittings) on hydraulic components before removal.
Mark parts if necessary to make sure that fittings will be
aligned properly when reinstalling hydraulic hoses and
tubes.
2. Lubricate o--rings and seals with clean hydraulic oil
before installing hydraulic components.
3. Make sure all caps or plugs are removed from the hydraulic tubes, hydraulic fittings and components before
reconnecting.
4. Use proper tightening methods when installing hydraulic hoses and fittings (see Hydraulic Fitting Installation in the General Information section of this Chapter).
5. After repairs, check control linkages and cables for
proper adjustment, binding or broken parts.
6. After disconnecting or replacing any hydraulic components, operate machine functions slowly until air is
out of system (see Hydraulic System Start Up in this section).
7. Check for hydraulic oil leaks. Shut off engine and correct leaks if necessary. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir (front axle) and add correct oil if necessary.
Check Hydraulic Lines and Hoses
WARNING
Keep body and hands away from pin hole leaks
or nozzles that eject hydraulic fluid under high
pressure. Use paper or cardboard, not hands, to
search for leaks. Hydraulic fluid escaping under
pressure can have sufficient force to penetrate
the skin and cause serious injury. If fluid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a doctor familiar
with this type of injury. Gangrene may result from
such an injury.
Hydraulic System
Check hydraulic lines and hoses daily for leaks, kinked
lines, loose mounting supports, wear, loose fittings,
weather deterioration and chemical deterioration. Make
all necessary repairs before operating.
Page 5 -- 28
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Flush Hydraulic System
IMPORTANT: Flush the hydraulic system any time
there is a severe component failure or the system is
contaminated (oil appears milky or black or contains metal particles).
8. Make sure traction pedal is in neutral and the P.T.O.
switch is off. Turn ignition key switch to start; engage
starter for ten (10) seconds to prime hydraulic pump.
Repeat this step again.
1. Park machine on a level surface. Lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from ignition switch.
9. Connect fuel stop solenoid (Groundsmaster
3280--D) or spark plug wires (Groundsmaster 3320) to
allow engine to start.
2. Drain hydraulic reservoir (front axle) (see Traction
Unit Operator’s Manual).
10.Start engine and let it idle at low speed for a minimum
of two (2) minutes.
3. Clean area around hydraulic filter mounting area.
Remove and discard hydraulic filter.
11. Increase engine speed to high idle for minimum of
one (1) minute under no load.
4. Drain entire hydraulic system. Drain all hoses, tubes
and components while the system is warm. Flush hoses
and tubes to remove any contamination.
12.Rotate steering wheel in both directions several
times. Raise and lower cutting deck (or implement) several times.
IMPORTANT: If a failure occurred in the traction circuit, traction circuit component disassembly and
thorough cleaning may be required to remove contaminates from the traction circuit. Because the
traction circuit is a closed loop, any contamination
will remain in the circuit and can cause additional
component damage unless it is removed.
13.Shut off engine and check for hydraulic oil leaks.
Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir (front axle) and add
correct oil if necessary.
15.Check condition of hydraulic oil. If the fluid shows any
signs of contamination, repeat steps 1 through 14 again.
16.Resume normal operation and follow recommended
maintenance intervals.
IMPORTANT: Use only hydraulic fluids specified in
Traction Unit Operator’s Manual. Other fluids could
cause system damage.
6. Fill hydraulic reservoir (front axle) (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
7. Perform the following to prevent engine from starting:
A. Disconnect electrical connector to the fuel stop
solenoid on Groundsmaster 3280--D machines.
B. Disconnect and ground all engine spark plug
wires on Groundsmaster 3320 machines.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 29
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
5. Make sure hydraulic filter mounting surface is clean.
Apply clean hydraulic oil to gasket on new filter. Screw
filter on until gasket contacts mounting plate, then tighten filter half a turn.
14.Operate the machine for two (2) hours under normal
operating conditions.
Hydraulic System Start--up
NOTE: When initially starting the hydraulic system with
new or rebuilt components such as pumps or lift cylinders, it is important that this start--up procedure be used.
This procedure reduces the chance of damaging the
system or its components from not purging the system
of air.
1. After the hydraulic system components have been
properly installed and if the hydrostatic transmission
was rebuilt or replaced, make sure hydrostat housing is
at least half full of clean hydraulic oil.
2. Make sure all hydraulic connections and lines are secured tightly.
3. Drain, flush and refill hydraulic system and change
hydraulic oil filter if component failure was severe or system is contaminated (See Flush Hydraulic System in
this section).
4. Make sure hydraulic reservoir (front axle) is full. Add
correct oil if necessary (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
5. Check control linkage for proper adjustment, binding
or broken parts.
7. Make sure traction pedal is in neutral and the P.T.O.
switch is off. Turn ignition key switch to start; engage
starter for ten (10) seconds to prime hydraulic pump.
8. Connect fuel stop solenoid (Groundsmaster
3280--D) or spark plug wires (Groundsmaster 3320) to
allow engine to start.
9. Make sure traction pedal is in neutral and the P.T.O.
switch is off. Start engine and run it at low idle. The
charge pump should pick up oil and fill the hydraulic system. If there is no indication of fill in 30 seconds, stop the
engine and determine the cause.
10.If the hydrostat was replaced or rebuilt, run the traction unit so the wheels turn slowly for 10 minutes.
11. Operate the traction unit (including steering and cutting deck lift/lower) by gradually increasing the work
load to full over a 10 minute period.
12.Stop the machine. Check hydraulic reservoir (front
axle) level and fill if necessary. Check hydraulic components for leaks and tighten any loose connections.
6. Perform the following to prevent engine from starting:
A. Disconnect electrical connector to the fuel stop
solenoid on Groundsmaster 3280--D machines.
B. Disconnect and ground all engine spark plug wires on Groundsmaster 3320 machines.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 30
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Hydraulic
System
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 31
Hydraulic System
Transmission Drive Shaft
RIGHT
FRONT
80 to 100 in--lb
(9.0 to 11.3 N--m)
8
3
13
Loctite #242
12
2
6
5
4
7
5
6
4
2
2
1
3
8
10
9
11
Figure 26
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drive shaft
Conelock nut
Flat washer
Rubber coupling
Coupling spacer
6.
7.
8.
9.
Cap screw
Square head screw (2 used)
Coupling spacer
Pump hub
Removal (Fig. 26)
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting deck (or implement) and stop engine. Remove key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove conelock nuts (item 2), flat washers (item 3)
and cap screws (item 10) that secure rubber coupling to
pump hub. Remove coupling spacers (item 8).
3. Remove cap screws (item 12), lock washers (item
13) and flat washers (item 3) that secure rubber coupling
to engine hub. Remove coupling spacers (item 8).
4. Remove drive shaft assembly from machine.
Hydraulic System
10.
11.
12.
13.
Cap screw
Transmission
Cap screw
Lock washer
5. Remove conelock nuts (item 2), coupling spacers
(item 5) and cap screws (item 6) that secure drive shaft
to rubber couplings.
6. Inspect rubber couplings and replace if cracked or
damaged.
Alignment (Fig. 26)
The engine crankshaft and the transmission input shaft
must be aligned within .125” (3 mm) of each other.
1. Verify that the drive shaft is straight and that the
flanges are perpendicular to the tube and are not bent.
Page 5 -- 32
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
3. Loosen square head screws (item 7) that secure
pump hub to transmission input shaft. Slide pump hub
toward engine, align holes in pump hub with drive shaft
flanges and place cap screws in holes.
4. Rotate drive shaft to check alignment of the drive
shaft in all positions. Drive shaft and hub must be
aligned within .125” (3 mm).
5. If alignment adjustment is needed, loosen lock nut
and jam nut that secure transmission anchor (Fig. 27).
NOTE: If necessary, loosen the lift arm carrier bracket
before installing shims between frame and axle mounting pad.
6. Loosen fasteners that secure front axle to frame.
Install shims between frame and axle mounting pads to
adjust location of transmission input shaft.
2. Insert coupling spacers (item 8) into rubber couplings. Position drive shaft assembly to engine and
pump hubs.
3. Secure rubber coupling to engine hub with cap
screws (item 12), lock washers (item 13) and flat washers (item 3). Tighten cap screws so spacers are tight
against flat washers.
4. After attaching drive shaft to pump hub, make sure
that neither rubber coupling is deformed more than
.250” (6.4 mm) in either direction. If necessary, remove
square head screws (item 7) from pump hub. Reposition
hub on shaft until coupling deflection is less than .250”
(6.4 mm). Apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads
of square head screws. Install screws into hub and
torque from 80 to 100 in--lb (9.0 to 11.3 N--m).
5. Secure rubber coupling to pump hub with conelock
nuts (item 2), flat washers (item 3) and cap screws (item
10). Tighten cap screws so spacers are tight against flat
washers.
A. If the transmission input shaft is high at the drive
coupling, lower input shaft by installing shim(s) between the rearward axle mounting pads and the
frame (or by removing shim(s) that may exist at forward mounting pads).
10
B. If the transmission input shaft is low at the drive
coupling, raise input shaft by installing shim(s) between the forward axle mounting pads and the frame
(or by removing shim(s) that exist at rearward axle
mounting pad).
11
1
7. When drive shaft alignment is correct, tighten fasteners to secure front axle to frame.
9
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten jam nut for transmission anchor as drive shaft alignment will be affected.
8
8. Tighten upper jam nut (item 8) until it contacts top of
transmission anchor and then tighten lock nut (item 6)
below transmission anchor (Fig. 27).
3
7
4
6
Installation (Fig. 26)
5
Figure 27
IMPORTANT: Make sure that drive shaft alignment
is correct before installing drive shaft.
1. Insert coupling spacers (item 5) into rubber coupling
holes. Secure rubber couplings to drive shaft with conelock nuts (item 2) and cap screws (item 6). Tighten so
spacers are tight against drive shaft.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Page 5 -- 33
Transmission
Shim
Flat washer
Cap screw
Carrier bracket
Lock nut
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Transmission anchor
Jam nut
Front axle
Cap screw
Lock nut
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
2. Attach the drive shaft directly to the engine hub to allow verification of drive shaft alignment.
Hydrostatic Transmission
24
RIGHT
21
20
FRONT
33
23
19
14
50
34 36
29 28
28
47
16
8
34
1
7
10
6
13
41
32
37
17
9
39
31
18
15
37
32
25
30
31
26
27
22
40
38
35
49
4
5
3
2
45
28
46
42
43
48
Loctite #242
44
43
12
11
Figure 28
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Cap screw
Cap screw (3 used)
Lock washer (4 used)
Flat washer
Spacer
Mounting spacer (4 used)
Pinion gear
Snap ring
Transmission gasket
Front axle assembly
Lock nut
Transmission anchor
Jam nut
Cap screw
Transmission
Cap screw (2 used)
Lock nut (2 used)
Hydraulic System
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Pump lever
Cotter pin
Flat washer
Rubber bushing
Hydraulic tee fitting
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hose clamp
Hydraulic fitting
Hydraulic fitting
O--ring
Hydraulic hose
Filter union
Hydraulic fitting
O--ring
Hydraulic hose
O--ring
Page 5 -- 34
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
Adapter
Plug
O--ring
Filter adapter
Jam nut
Hydraulic filter
Hose clamp
Elbow fitting
Hose clamp
Hydraulic hose
Filter adapter seal
Hydraulic hose
Straight hydraulic fitting
Hydraulic hose
Elbow fitting
Traction rod
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage parking
brake, lower cutting deck (or implement) and stop engine. Remove key from the ignition switch.
2. To prevent contamination of the hydraulic system,
thoroughly clean transmission and front axle.
CAUTION
Operate all hydraulic controls to relieve system
pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
3. Label hydraulic hoses to assist in assembly. Disconnect all hydraulic hoses from the transmission assembly. Allow hoses to drain into a suitable container. Plug
or cap openings of transmission and hoses to prevent
contamination.
4. On 4 wheel drive machines, disconnect 4WD driveshaft from transmission (see Rear Axle Drive Shaft (4
Wheel Drive) Removal in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 8 -- Drive Axles). Position drive shaft
away from transmission.
5. Remove transmission drive shaft (see Transmission
Drive Shaft Removal in this section).
6. Remove cotter pin (item 19) and flat washer (item 20)
that retain traction rod end (item 50) to pump lever. Remove traction rod from lever.
7. Label location of wires attached to neutral switch.
Disconnect wires from switch and position away from
transmission.
8. Remove lock nut (item 11) that secures transmission
to transmission anchor (item 12).
CAUTION
Support transmission when removing it from the
front axle to prevent it from falling and causing
personal injury.
9. Loosen and remove four (4) cap screws (items 1 and
2) that secure transmission to front axle. Locate and retrieve washers (items 3 and 4) and spacers (items 5 and
6). Note location of washers and spacers for assembly
purposes.
10.Carefully pull the transmission from the front axle differential.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
11. Remove and discard gasket (item 9). Clean gasket
surfaces of transmission and front axle.
12.If necessary, remove hydraulic fittings from transmission. Note orientation of fittings for assembly purposes.
13.Remove and discard all o--rings from removed hydraulic hoses and fittings.
IMPORTANT: Pump lever is secured to transmission shaft with Loctite #680 Retaining Compound in
addition to cap screws and lock nuts. Use puller to
remove pump lever from transmission. To prevent
transmission damage, do not strike lever with hammer during removal.
14.If pump lever (item 18) removal is necessary, remove
two (2) cap screws and lock nuts. Use puller to remove
lever from transmission shaft.
Installation (Fig. 28)
1. Coat new hydraulic fitting o--rings lightly with clean
hydraulic oil. Install fittings with new o--rings to the transmission. Orientate the fittings as noted during disassembly.
2. If pump lever (item 18) was removed, clean pump
shaft thoroughly and apply Loctite #680 Retaining Compound (or equivalent) to pump shaft. Slide pump lever
onto shaft and secure with two (2) cap screws and lock
nuts.
3. Apply non--hardening gasket sealant to both sides of
gasket (item 9). Position gasket to front axle gasket surface.
4. Carefully position transmission to front axle taking
care not to move or damage gasket. Make sure that
transmission and axle gears mesh properly.
IMPORTANT: During assembly, make sure that upper left screw (item 1) extends through hole in transmission anchor (item 12).
5. Apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads of cap
screws (items 1 and 2). Secure transmission to front
axle with cap screws, washers (items 3 and 4) and
spacers (items 5 and 6) using locations noted during disassembly. Tighten cap screws in a crossing pattern. After tightening, make sure that mounting spacers (item 6)
do not rotate.
6. Secure transmission to anchor (item 12) with lock nut
(item 11). Retain upper left cap screw (item 1) while
tightening lock nut.
7. Connect machine harness wires to neutral switch.
Page 5 -- 35
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
Removal (Fig. 28)
8. Slide traction rod (item 50) to pump lever and secure
with flat washer (item 20) and cotter pin (item 19).
11. Install hydraulic hoses to fittings on transmission in
positions noted during disassembly.
9. Check transmission drive shaft alignment and adjust
if necessary (see Transmission Drive Shaft in this section). Install transmission drive shaft.
12.Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
10.On 4 wheel drive machines, connect 4WD driveshaft
to transmission (see Rear Axle Drive Shaft (4 Wheel
Drive) Installation in the Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 8 -- Drive Axles).
13.Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures.
Hydraulic System
14.Check traction drive for neutral and neutral switch
adjustment (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Page 5 -- 36
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Hydraulic
System
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 37
Hydraulic System
Hydrostatic Transmission Service
7
9
4
5
1
48
3
13
2
14
15
10
19
11
8
24
16
26
31
14
33
27
36
12
6
25
32
5
7
23
22
20
49
17
47
46
40
46
48
40
29
18
40
30
21
34
50
15
18
54
35
53
24
52
23
45
44
39
37
41
56
51
42
38
57
28
55
43
Figure 29
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Retaining ring
Trunnion shaft
Flat washer
Roller bearing
Needle bearing
Transmission housing
Lip seal
Trunnion cam
Lip seal
Ball bearing
Woodruff key
Pump shaft
Swash plate
Spring pin
Thrust plate
Cylinder block (pump)
Pump valve plate
Needle bearing
Slipper retainer (pump)
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
Piston (pump) (9 used per block)
O-ring
Check valve
Plug
O-ring
Shim pack
Relief valve spring
Relief valve cone
Plug
Cap screw (2 used)
Cap screw (2 used)
Backup ring
O-ring
O-ring
Pin
Bearing
Woodruff key
Gerotor (charge) pump
Shaft seal
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
Center section
Pipe plug (4 used)
O--ring
Threaded plug
Cap screw (4 used)
Expansion plug
Motor valve plate
Dowel pin
Motor shaft
Dowel pin (2 used)
Housing gasket
Charge pump housing
Retaining ring
Cylinder block (motor)
Slipper retainer (motor)
Piston (motor) (9 used per block)
Flange head screw (2 used)
O--ring (2 used)
Threaded plug (2 used)
NOTE: For transmission repair information, see the
Sauer--Danfoss (Sundstrand) 15 Series Repair Manual
and Service Manual at the end of this chapter.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 38
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Hydrostatic Transmission Neutral Arm Assembly
28 to 36 in--lb
(3.3 to 4.1 N--m)
18
16
17
15
71 to 89 in--lb
(8 to 10 N--m)
14
71 to 89 in--lb
(8 to 10 N--m)
11
13
12
9
1
2
10
9
3
8
15 to 17 ft--lb
(20 to 24 N--m)
4
7
5
6
Transmission housing
Cap screw
Mounting plate
Neutral return spring
Neutral return arm
Bushing
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Grease fitting
Eccentric pin
Retaining ring
Jam nut
Socket head screw
Pin
Disassembly (Fig. 30)
1. Disassemble neutral arm components on hydrostatic transmission as needed using Figure 30 as a guide.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Bearing
Socket head screw (4 used)
Socket head screw
Neutral proximity switch
Trunnion cam
Seal
4. Check for correct operation of neutral switch and adjust if needed (see Traction Neutral Switch adjustment
in the Components section of Chapter 6 -- Electrical System).
NOTE: To remove trunnion cam (item 17) from hydrostatic transmission, transmission has to be disassembled.
Assembly (Fig. 30)
2
1. Assemble neutral arm components to hydrostatic
transmission using Figure 30 as a guide. If eccentric pin
(item 8) was removed, make sure that mark on eccentric
pin is orientated to top of transmission. Note fastener
torque specifications shown in Figure 30.
1
2. Lubricate grease fitting on eccentric pin (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Figure 31
1. Eccentric pin
2. Alignment mark
3. Check and adjust neutral position (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 39
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
Figure 30
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lift Cylinder
20
4
5
3
6
7
1
11
8
9
13
15
12
5
3
10
16
14
2
17
7
1
8
19
9
10
18
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 32
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lift cylinder
Cap screw
O--ring
Hydraulic fitting
O--ring
Hydraulic hose
Hose clamp
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Hose stem
Cotter pin
Cylinder pin
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic tee fitting
Hydraulic hose
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Hydraulic tee fitting
O--ring
Test port
Lift arm (LH shown)
Lock nut
Lift control valve
NOTE: If lift cylinder wear or damage occurs, lift cylinder replacement is necessary. Lift cylinders are not rebuildable.
NOTE: On machines with serial numbers above
260000001, the test port (item 17) is located on the RH
lift cylinder.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 40
Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Removal (Fig. 32)
Installation (Fig. 32)
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting deck (or implement) and
stop the engine. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
1. Coat new o--rings lightly with clean hydraulic oil.
Install hydraulic fittings with new o--rings to the lift cylinder.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the beginning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
2. Position lift cylinder to the frame with the barrel end
up.
3. Slide cap screw (item 2) through lift cylinder and
frame mounting holes.
4. Align lift cylinder to lift arm mounting holes. Slide cylinder pin (item 10) through the lift cylinder and lift arm.
CAUTION
Operate all hydraulic controls to relieve system
pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
5. Secure cylinder pin with cotter pin (item 9).
6. Remove caps and plugs from disconnected hoses
and fittings.
3. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from fittings in lift cylinder that is to be removed. Allow hoses to drain into a suitable container. Remove and discard o--rings.
7. Install new o--ring(s) and connect hydraulic hoses to
hydraulic fittings on lift cylinder. Tighten hose connections.
4. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
8. Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
5. Remove one cotter pin (item 9) from the cylinder pin
(item 10). Pull cylinder pin from the lift cylinder and lift
arm.
9. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures.
Hydraulic
System
6. Remove lock nut (item 11) from cap screw (item 2)
that retains lift cylinder to frame.
7. Support lift cylinder and slide cap screw (item 2) from
the lift cylinder and frame.
8. Lower lift cylinder from the frame.
9. Remove hydraulic fittings and o--rings from the lift
cylinder as required. Discard o--rings.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 41
Hydraulic System
Steering Control Valve
32
30
24
23
25
26 17 27
31
20 to 26 ft--lb
(27.1 to 35.3 N--m)
29
14
28
22
21
20
19
14
18
17
16
12
33
13
15
14
3
11
34
1
35
2
RIGHT
FRONT
10
9
5
8
7
4
6
Figure 33
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Tower panel
Phillips head screw (6 used)
Nut retainer (6 used)
Flange head screw
Sleeve protector
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Tilt steering lever
Grip
Hydraulic System
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Steering control valve
Flange nut
Cap screw (2 used)
Spacer
Flange head screw
Spacer
Spring washer (4 used)
Socket head screw (4 used)
Jam nut
Flange nut (2 used)
Friction disc
Pivot plate
Page 5 -- 42 Rev. A
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
Friction disc
Flat washer
Tilt bracket
Steering column
Foam collar
Steering wheel
Hex nut
Steering wheel cover
Knob
Compression spring
Parking brake rod
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Removal (Fig. 33)
Installation (Fig. 33)
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting deck (or implement) and
stop the engine. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
1. Slide steering control valve onto steering column.
Secure steering control valve to steering column with
four (4) socket head screws (item 20) and spring washers (item 19).
2. Remove knob from end of parking brake rod.
2. Remove caps and plugs from disconnected hoses
and fittings.
3. Remove six (6) phillips head screws that secure tower panel to machine. Raise tower panel to allow access
to steering control valve.
4. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the beginning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
5. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly purposes. Note port designations on steering control valve
(Fig. 34).Clean hydraulic hose ends prior to disconnecting the hoses.
3. Lubricate new o--rings and connect hydraulic hoses
to steering control valve. Tighten hose connections.
4. Position tower panel in place and secure with six (6)
phillips head screws.
5. Install knob on end of parking brake rod.
6. Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
7. After assembly is completed, rotate steering wheel
to verify that hydraulic hoses and fittings are not contacted by anything and that there are no leaks.
CAUTION
Operate all hydraulic controls to relieve system
pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
8. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures.
Hydraulic
System
6. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from steering control
valve. Allow hoses to drain into a suitable container.
7. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
8. Support steering control valve to prevent it from falling during removal.
9. Loosen and remove four (4) socket head screws
(item 20) and spring washers (item 19) that secure
steering control valve to steering column.
Figure 34
10.Slide steering control valve from steering column
and remove from machine.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 43
Hydraulic System
Steering Control Valve Service
8
9
7
6
10
5
4
3
2
11
1
12
22
13
14
15
21
13
16
20
13
17
18
20 to 24 ft--lb
(27 to 33 N--m)
19
Figure 35
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Sleeve
Cross pin
Ring
Spool
Bearing assembly
Shaft seal
Ball stop
Ball
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Dust seal ring
Housing
Cardan shaft
Spacer
O--ring
Distribution plate
Inner gearwheel
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Outer gearwheel
End cover
O--ring (5 used)
Screw/fitting (ports L, R, T)
Screw/fitting (ports P and E)
P port check ball
Spring set
NOTE: For repair of the steering control valve, see the
Sauer Danfoss Steering Unit Type OSPM Service
Manual at the end of this chapter.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 44
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Hydraulic
System
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 45
Hydraulic System
Steering Cylinder (2 Wheel Drive)
2
3
4
1
5
2
6
13
130 to 150 ft--lb
(176 to 203 N--m)
4
7
8
12
9
10
RIGHT
11
FRONT
130 to 150 ft--lb
(176 to 203 N--m)
Figure 36
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Steering cylinder
O--ring
45o hydraulic fitting
O--ring
Hydraulic fitting
Hydraulic System
6.
7.
8.
9.
Cap screw
Lock nut
Rear axle (2WD)
Washer
Page 5 -- 46
10.
11.
12.
13.
Steering pivot
Flange lock nut
Cap screw
Spacer ring
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Removal (Fig. 36)
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting deck (or implement) and
stop the engine. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the beginning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
2. Position steering cylinder to machine. Make sure to
place spacer ring (item 13) and washer (item 9) in locations noted during removal (Fig. 37).
3. Secure steering cylinder to machine with cap screws
(items 12 and 6) and lock nuts (items 7 and 11). Torque
lock nuts from 130 to 150 ft--lb (176 to 203 N--m).
4. Remove caps and plugs from hydraulic hoses and
fittings.
5. Correctly connect hydraulic hoses to steering cylinder.
Operate all hydraulic controls to relieve system
pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
3. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly purposes. Clean hydraulic hose ends prior to disconnecting
the hoses.
4. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from steering cylinder.
5. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
6. Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
7. Lubricate cylinder grease fittings (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
8. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures.
9. Check that steering cylinder does not contact the
axle or frame as cylinder moves from fully retracted to
fully extended.
1
6. Remove cap screws (items 12 and 6) and lock nuts
(items 7 and 11) that secure steering cylinder to machine.
7. Pull steering cylinder from machine. Locate and retrieve spacer ring (item 13) and washer (item 9) and note
location for installation purposes (Fig. 37).
2
3
8. Remove hydraulic fittings from steering cylinder if required. Note orientation of 45o fitting before removing
from steering cylinder.
Installation (Fig. 36)
1. Coat new o--rings lightly with clean hydraulic oil. If removed, install hydraulic fittings with new o--rings to the
steering cylinder. Make sure that 45o fitting is positioned
correctly.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
9
6
5
4
8
7
Figure 37
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Page 5 -- 47
Cap screw
Washer
Steering pivot mount
Lock nut
Steering cylinder
6.
7.
8.
9.
Spacer ring
Cap screw
Axle cylinder mount
Lock nut
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
CAUTION
Steering Cylinder Service (2 Wheel Drive)
3
5
6
1
9
2
10
12
4
7
8
11
13
Figure 38
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grease fitting
Piston rod
Wiper
Gland
Seal
6.
7.
8.
9.
O--ring
O--ring
Piston
Seal
10.
11.
12.
13.
Disassembly (Fig. 38)
1. Remove oil from cylinder into a drain pan by slowly
pumping the cylinder shaft. Plug both ports and clean
the outside of cylinder.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
steering cylinder into a vise; clamp on the pivot end
only. Do not close vise enough to distort the barrel.
O--ring
Lock nut
Barrel
Grease fitting
5. Mount rod securely in a vise. Remove lock nut (item
11) and piston from the rod. Slide gland off the rod.
6. Remove and discard seal (item 9) and o--rings (items
7 and 10) from the piston. Remove and discard wiper
(item 3), o--ring (item 6) and seal (item 5) from the head.
Inspection
2. Mount steering cylinder in a vise so that the shaft end
tilts up slightly.
CAUTION
3. Using a spanner wrench, remove gland (item 4) from
the barrel.
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air.
4. Grasp clevis end of piston rod (item 2); extract rod,
gland (item 4) and piston (item 8) by carefully twisting
and pulling the rod from the barrel.
1. Wash all cylinder components in solvent. Dry parts
with compressed air.
IMPORTANT: Do not clamp vise jaws against rod
surface. Protect rod surface before mounting in the
vise.
2. Inspect internal surface of barrel for deep scratches,
out--of--roundness and bending. Replace if worn or
damaged.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 48
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
3. Inspect head, piston rod and piston for excessive pitting, scoring and wear. Replace any worn or damaged
parts.
Assembly (Fig. 38)
1. Coat new seals, wiper and all o--rings lightly with hydraulic oil. Install new seal and o--rings to the piston.
Install wiper, o--ring and seal to the gland.
IMPORTANT: Do not clamp vise jaws against piston
rod surface. Protect rod surface before mounting in
vise.
2. Mount rod securely in a vise.
5. Remove shaft from vise.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
barrel into a vise; clamp on the pivot end only. Do
not close vise enough to distort barrel.
6. Mount barrel in a vise so that the rod end tilts up
slightly.
7. Coat all internal steering cylinder parts with a light
coat of hydraulic oil. Slide piston, rod and gland assembly into barrel being careful not to damage the seals.
8. Using a spanner wrench, secure gland in barrel.
Hydraulic
System
3. Coat rod lightly with hydraulic oil. Slide gland onto the
shaft being careful not to damage the wiper, o--ring and
seal.
4. Install piston onto the rod being careful not to damage o--ring. Install lock nut onto the rod and tighten.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 49
Hydraulic System
Steering Cylinder (4 Wheel Drive)
9
10
70 to 90 ft--lb
(95 to 122 N--m)
11
8
5
6
4
12
4
7
37 to 42 ft--lb
(50 to 57 N--m)
3
20
2
21
14
12
13
1
13
18
15
16
18
17
RIGHT
FRONT
19
Figure 39
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Steering cylinder
O--ring
90o hydraulic fitting
O--ring
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
45o hydraulic fitting
Hydraulic System
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Grease fitting
Washer head screw
Rear axle pin
Grease fitting
Retaining ring
Ball joint
Grease fitting
Page 5 -- 50
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Cylinder support bracket
Cap screw (4 used)
Washer (4 used)
Jam nut (4 used)
Rear axle (4WD)
Thrust washer
Jam nut
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Removal (Fig. 39)
Installation (Fig. 39)
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting deck (or implement) and
stop the engine. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
1. Coat new o--rings lightly with clean hydraulic oil. If removed, install hydraulic fittings with new o--rings to the
steering cylinder. Make sure to position fittings correctly
in cylinder.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the beginning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
2. If removed, install ball joints to steering cylinder.
Operate all hydraulic controls to relieve system
pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
3. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly purposes. Clean hydraulic hose ends prior to disconnecting
the hoses.
4. Remove caps and plugs from hydraulic hoses and
fittings.
5. Correctly connect hydraulic hoses to steering cylinder.
4. Disconnect hydraulic hoses from steering cylinder.
6. Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
5. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
7. Lubricate cylinder grease fittings (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
6. Remove four (4) jam nuts that secure steering cylinder to machine.
8. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures.
7. Separate steering cylinder ball joints from rear axle.
Remove steering cylinder with ball joints from machine.
9. Check that steering cylinder does not contact the
axle or frame as cylinder moves from fully retracted to
fully extended.
8. If needed, remove ball joints from steering cylinder.
9. Remove hydraulic fittings from steering cylinder if required. Note orientation of fittings before removing from
steering cylinder.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 51
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
CAUTION
3. Position steering cylinder to rear axle. Secure cylinder to axle with jam nuts. Install first jam nut onto cylinder
ball joint threads and torque from 70 to 90 ft--lb (95 to 122
N--m). Then, while retaining first jam nut with wrench,
install and torque second jam nut from 70 to 90 ft--lb (95
to 122 N--m).
Steering Cylinder Service (4 Wheel Drive)
1
5
7
10
2
11
3
12
6
4
8
9
Figure 40
1.
2.
3.
4.
Internal collar
Dust seal
Backup washer
O--ring
5.
6.
7.
8.
Head
Rod seal
Shaft
O--ring
9.
10.
11.
12.
Disassembly (Fig. 40)
1. Remove oil from cylinder into a drain pan by slowly
pumping the cylinder shaft. Plug both ports and clean
the outside of cylinder.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
steering cylinder into a vise; clamp on the pivot end
only. Do not close vise enough to distort the barrel.
2. Mount steering cylinder in a vise so that the shaft end
tilts up slightly.
3. Remove internal collar (item 1) from the barrel.
4. Grasp clevis end of shaft (item 7); extract shaft, head
(item 5) and piston (item 10) by carefully twisting and
pulling the shaft from the barrel.
IMPORTANT: Do not clamp vise jaws against shaft
surface. Protect shaft surface before mounting in
the vise.
5. Mount shaft securely in a vise. Remove lock nut (item
11) and piston from the shaft. Slide head and internal
collar off the shaft.
Hydraulic System
Uni--ring
Piston
Lock nut
Barrel
6. Remove and discard uni--ring (item 9) and o--ring
(item 8) from the piston. Remove and discard dust seal
(item 2), backup washer (item 3), o--ring (item 4) and rod
seal (item 6) from the head.
Inspection
CAUTION
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air.
1. Wash all cylinder components in solvent. Dry parts
with compressed air.
2. Inspect internal surface of barrel for deep scratches,
out--of--roundness and bending. Replace if worn or
damaged.
3. Inspect head, shaft and piston for excessive pitting,
scoring and wear. Replace any worn or damaged parts.
Page 5 -- 52
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Assembly (Fig. 40)
5. Remove shaft from vise.
1. Coat new dust seal, uni--ring, backup washer, rod
seal and all o--rings lightly with hydraulic oil. Install new
o--ring and uni--ring to the piston. Install dust seal, backup washer, o--ring and rod seal to the head.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage when clamping the
barrel into a vise; clamp on the pivot end only. Do
not close vise enough to distort barrel.
IMPORTANT: Do not clamp vise jaws against shaft
surface. Protect shaft surface before mounting in
vise.
2. Mount shaft securely in a vise.
3. Coat shaft lightly with hydraulic oil. Slide internal collar and head onto the shaft being careful not to damage
the rod seal and dust seal.
6. Mount barrel in a vise so that the shaft end tilts up
slightly.
7. Coat all internal steering cylinder parts with a light
coat of hydraulic oil. Slide piston, shaft and head assembly into barrel being careful not to damage the seals.
8. Secure head in barrel by installing internal collar into
barrel.
Hydraulic
System
4. Install piston onto the shaft being careful not to damage o--ring. Install lock nut onto the shaft and tighten.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 53
Hydraulic System
Lift Control Valve
1
21
4 22
2
3
4
5
4
6
2
7
8
20
2
3
4
9
13
19
14
18
10
12
11
15
16
RIGHT
FRONT
17
Figure 41
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lift control valve
O--ring
Hydraulic adapter
O--ring
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic fitting
O--ring
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Hydraulic hose
Flat washer (2 used)
Cap screw (2 used)
Lock washer (2 used)
Pin
Cotter pin
Lift lever
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Flange nut
Spacer
Cap screw
Knob
Link tube
Hydraulic hose
Check valve
NOTE: On Groundsmaster 3280--D machines with serial numbers below 270000401 and Groundsmaster
3320 machines with serial numbers below 280000000,
the lift control valve incorporates the counterbalance
valve (Fig. 41). On later machines (larger serial numbers), the counterbalance valve is located in a separate
manifold (Fig. 42).
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 54 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Removal (Figs. 41 and 42)
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting deck (or implement) and
stop the engine. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
5. Connect hydraulic hoses to hydraulic fittings on lift
control valve.
6. Install fuel tank to machine (see Fuel Tank Installation in Chapter 3 -- Gasoline Engine or Chapter 4 -- Diesel Engine).
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the beginning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
7. Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
3. Remove fuel tank from machine (see Fuel Tank Removal in Chapter 3 -- Gasoline Engine or Chapter 4 -Diesel Engine).
8. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures.
4. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly purposes. Clean hydraulic hose ends prior to disconnecting
the hoses.
9. Check counterbalance valve adjustment (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
4
CAUTION
3
2
1
Operate all hydraulic controls to relieve system
pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
6. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
7. Remove cotter pin (item 14) and pin (item 13) that secure link tube (item 20) to control valve.
8
7
5
6
Figure 42
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lift control valve
Hydraulic adapter
Hydraulic tube
Counterbalance manifold
5.
6.
7.
8.
Hydraulic fitting
Cap screw (2 used)
Lock washer (2 used)
Flat washer (2 used)
8. Remove two (2) cap screws (item 11), lock washers
(item 12) and flat washers (item 10) that secure lift control valve to machine.
9. Remove control valve from the machine.
10.Remove hydraulic fittings as necessary from the
control valve. Discard all removed o--rings.
Installation (Figs. 41 and 42)
1. Coat new o--rings lightly with clean hydraulic oil.
Install all removed hydraulic fittings with new o--rings to
the lift control valve.
2. Position lift control valve to machine frame. Secure
control valve to machine with two (2) cap screws (item
11), lock washers (item 12) and flat washers (item 10).
3. Secure link tube (item 20) to control valve with pin
(item 13) and cotter pin (item 14).
4. Remove all caps or plugs from hydraulic hoses and
fittings.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 55 Rev. A
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
5. Disconnect hose connections from hydraulic fittings
on lift control valve. Allow hoses to drain into a suitable
container.
2
Lift Control Valve Service
18 to 20 ft--lb
(24 to 27 N--m)
Loctite #242
10 to 15 ft--lb
(14 to 20 N--m)
35 to 40 ft--lb
(47 to 54 N--m)
18 to 20 ft--lb
(24 to 27 N--m)
Loctite #242
35 to 40 ft--lb
(47 to 54 N--m)
16
21
24
25
1
17
2
19
18
24 to 36 in--lb
(2.7 to 4.1 N--m)
Loctite #242
22
23
15
11
10
14
9
7
5
12
8
4
4
6
20
3
13
Figure 43
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Detent ball
Spring
Gasket
O--ring
Screw
Washer
Screw and lock washer (2 used)
Spool
Plug
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Poppet stop
Poppet
End cap
Spacer
Adapter plug
O--ring
Detent plug
Spring
Disassembly (Fig. 43)
1. Plug all ports and clean the outside of control valve
thoroughly.
2. Remove two (2) screws with lock washers (item 7)
that secure end cap (item 12) to control valve. Remove
end cap.
3. Remove screw (item 5), spacer (item 13), spring
(item 20) and washer (item 6) from control valve.
4. Carefully slide spool (item 8) from housing bore.
Hydraulic System
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
O--ring
Detent plunger
Spring
O--ring
Lockout seat (black)
O--ring
O--ring
Lockout seat (silver)
5. Carefully remove o--rings (item 4) from spool bore.
Take care not to damage spool bore or o--ring cavities
during o--ring removal.
6. Remove detent plug (item 16), o--ring (item 18),
spring (item 17) and detent ball (item 1).
7. Remove plug (item 9) with o--ring (item 21) and lockout seat (item 25) with o--ring (item 24) from valve body.
8. Remove adapter plug (item 14) with o--ring (item 15),
poppet stop (item 10), spring (item 2), and poppet (item
11) from control valve body.
Page 5 -- 56
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
10.If control valve is equipped with counterbalance
valve (Fig. 44), remove valve from control valve if needed. Counterbalance valve disassembly is not recommended.
Inspection
1. Inspect spool and spool bore for wear. If wear is excessive, replace lift control valve assembly.
2. Inspect all springs and replace if damaged or broken.
3. Inspect detent plunger, detent ball and poppet for
wear. Replace as necessary.
4. Inspect lockout seats for wear or damage. Replace
as necessary.
5. Inspect control valve housing threads and o--ring
sealing surfaces. Replace as necessary.
6. Inspect threads and o--ring sealing surfaces on
plugs. Replace as necessary.
Assembly (Fig. 43)
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe parts with dry paper towels or rags. Lint may cause damage to the hydraulic
system.
CAUTION
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air.
6. Apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads of
screws (item 7).
7. Position gasket (item 3) and end cap (item 12) to control valve. Secure end cap to valve with two (2) screws
with lock washers (item 7). Torque screws from 24 to 36
in--lb (2.7 to 4.1 N--m).
8. Lubricate detent plunger (item 19) with clean hydraulic oil and slide into control valve bore.
9. Install new o--rings (items 23 and 24) to lockout seats
(items 22 and 25). Apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to
threads of lockout seats. Install seats into control valve.
Torque seats from 18 to 20 ft--lb (24 to 27 N--m).
10.Lubricate poppet (item 11), poppet stop (item 10)
and spring (item 2) liberally with clean hydraulic fluid and
install into control valve bore.
11. Install adapter plug (item 14) with new o--ring (item
15) and plug (item 9) with new o--ring (item 21) into control valve. Torque plugs from 35 to 40 ft--lb (47 to 54
N--m).
12.Install new o--ring to detent plug (item 16). Lubricate
detent ball (item 1) and spring (item 17) with clean hydraulic fluid and install into detent plug.
13.Install detent plug assembly to control valve. Torque
plug from 10 to 15 ft--lb (14 to 20 N--m).
14.If counterbalance valve was removed, carefully
thread valve into control valve housing (Fig. 44). Torque
counterbalance valve from 35 to 40 ft--lb (47 to 54 N--m).
2
1. Clean all control valve components with clean solvent and blow dry with compressed air.
2. Replace all removed o--rings. Lightly lubricate new
o--rings with clean hydraulic oil before assembly.
3. Install new o--rings into control valve spool bore.
4. Lubricate spool liberally with clean hydraulic fluid
and carefully install into control valve bore.
5. Coat spacer (item 13), spring (item 20) and washer
(item 6) liberally with MPG--2 (or equivalent) grease. Apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads of screw (item
5). Install washer, spring and spacer into valve and secure with screw. Torque screw from 24 to 36 in--lb (2.7
to 4.1 N--m).
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
3
1
35 to 40 ft--lb
(47 to 54 N--m)
Figure 44
1. Lift control valve
2. Spool
Page 5 -- 57 Rev. A
3. Counterbalance valve
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic
System
9. Remove lockout seat (item 22) with o--ring (item 23)
from control valve body. Remove detent plunger (item
19).
Counterbalance Valve Manifold (If Equipped)
10
RIGHT
6
11
5
FRONT
3
7
2
4
4
1
2
4
4
2
9
5
2
8
Figure 45
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lift control valve
Hydraulic adapter
Hydraulic tube
O--Ring
5.
6.
7.
8.
O--Ring
Counterbalance manifold
Cap screw (2 used)
Hydraulic hose
NOTE: The counterbalance valve manifold is used on
Groundsmaster 3280--D machines with serial numbers
above 270000401 and Groundsmaster 3320 machines
with serial numbers above 280000000.
Removal (Fig. 45)
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting deck (or implement) and
stop the engine. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
2. Read the General Precautions for Removing and
Installing Hydraulic System Components at the beginning of the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
3. Remove fuel tank from machine (see Fuel Tank Removal in Chapter 3 -- Gasoline Engine or Chapter 4 -Diesel Engine).
4. Label all hydraulic connections for assembly purposes. Clean hydraulic hose ends prior to disconnecting
the hoses from control manifold.
Hydraulic System
9. Hydraulic hose
10. Flange nut (2 used)
11. Mounting bracket
CAUTION
Operate all hydraulic controls to relieve system
pressure and avoid injury from pressurized hydraulic oil.
5. Disconnect hose connections from hydraulic fittings
on counterbalance valve manifold. Allow hoses to drain
into a suitable container.
6. Put caps or plugs on disconnected hoses and fittings
to prevent contamination.
7. Remove two (2) cap screws and flange nuts that secure manifold to machine.
8. Remove manifold from the machine.
9. Remove hydraulic fittings as necessary from the
manifold. Discard all removed o--rings.
Page 5 -- 58 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Manifold Service (Fig. 46)
1. Make sure the manifold is thoroughly cleaned before
removing either of the valves.
IMPORTANT: Use care when handling the hydraulic
valve. Slight bending or distortion of the stem tube
can cause binding and malfunction.
2. Using a deep socket, remove valves from manifold.
Note correct location of o--rings, sealing rings and backup rings. Remove and discard seal kit from valves.
3. Visually inspect the manifold port and removed
valves for damage to the sealing surfaces, damaged
threads and contamination.
A. Contamination may cause valve to stick or hang
up. Contamination can become lodged in small valve
orifices or seal areas causing valve malfunction.
B. If valve sealing surfaces appear pitted or damaged, the hydraulic system may be overheating or
there may be water in the system.
4. Connect hydraulic hoses to hydraulic fittings on
manifold.
5. Install fuel tank to machine (see Fuel Tank Installation in Chapter 3 -- Gasoline Engine or Chapter 4 -- Diesel Engine).
6. Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
7. Follow Hydraulic System Start--up procedures.
8. Check counterbalance valve adjustment (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
2
25 ft--lb
(34 N--m)
3
CAUTION
20 ft--lb
(27 N--m)
Use eye protection such as goggles when using
compressed air for cartridge valve cleaning.
5. Lubricate new valve seal kit components with clean
hydraulic oil and install on valves. The o--rings, sealing
rings and backup rings must be arranged properly on
the valves for proper operation and sealing.
1
Hydraulic
System
4. Clean valves by submerging valve in clean mineral
spirits to flush out contamination. Particles as fine as talcum powder can affect the operation of the valve. Be extremely careful not to damage cartridge. Use
compressed air for cleaning.
4
Figure 46
1. Manifold
2. Counterbalance valve
3. Check valve
4. Plug
6. Thread valves carefully into correct manifold port.
The valves should go in easily without binding. Using a
deep socket, torque valves to values identified in Figure
46.
Installation (Fig. 45)
1. Coat new o--rings lightly with clean hydraulic oil.
Install all removed hydraulic fittings with new o--rings to
the manifold.
2. Position counterbalance valve manifold to machine
frame. Secure manifold to machine with two (2) cap
screws and flange nuts.
3. Remove all caps or plugs from hydraulic hoses and
fittings.
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Page 5 -- 59 Rev. A
Hydraulic System
Oil Cooler (Groundsmaster 3280--D)
3
4
2
1
5
2
6
3
5
7
8
9
10
11
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 47
1.
2.
3.
4.
Radiator
Lock washer
Hex nut
Oil cooler
5.
6.
7.
8.
O--ring
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Flange head screw
9. Radiator support
10. Flange nut
11. Radiator shield
Removal (Fig. 47)
Installation (Fig. 47)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Position and secure oil cooler to radiator with lock
washers and hex nuts.
2. Open hood (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Remove the radiator screen.
3. Loosen and remove hydraulic hoses from oil cooler.
Remove and discard o--rings. Allow hoses to drain oil
into a suitable container.
4. Remove hex nuts and lock washers that secure oil
cooler to radiator.
2. Coat new o--rings with hydraulic oil and position o-rings to hydraulic hose ends. Install hydraulic hoses to
oil cooler.
3. Install radiator screen and close hood.
4. Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
5. Pull oil cooler from radiator.
Hydraulic System
Page 5 -- 60
Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280--D/3320
Chapter 6
Electrical System
Table of Contents
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Starting Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
General Run and Operating Problems . . . . . . . . . 6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM QUICK CHECKS . . . . . . . . 8
Battery Test (Open Circuit Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Charging System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Glow Plug System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Check Operation of Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . 9
COMPONENT TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Hour Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
P.T.O. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Temperature Sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
High Temperature Shutdown Switch . . . . . . . . . . 14
Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Standard Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Neutral Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P.T.O. Electric Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusible Link Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Stop Solenoid (Groundsmaster 3280−D) . .
Glow Controller (Groundsmaster 3280−D) . . . . .
Glow Relay (Groundsmaster 3280−D) . . . . . . . .
Fuel Pump (Groundsmaster 3280−D) . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Pump (Groundsmaster 3320) . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Pump Relay (Groundsmaster 3320) . . . . . .
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P.T.O. Electric Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
28
28
29
32
Electrical Diagrams
Electrical
System
The electrical schematic, electrical circuit drawings and
wire harness drawings for the Groundsmaster 3280−D
and 3320 are located in Chapter 11 − Electrical Diagrams.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 1
Electrical System
Special Tools
Order special tools from your Toro Distributor. Some
tools may also be available from a local supplier.
Multimeter
The multimeter can test electrical components and circuits for current, resistance, or voltage. Obtain this tool
locally.
NOTE: Toro recommends the use of a DIGITAL Volt−
Ohm−Amp multimeter when testing electrical circuits.
The high impedance (internal resistance) of a digital meter in the voltage mode will make sure that excess current is not allowed through the meter. This excess
current can cause damage to circuits not designed to
carry it.
Figure 1
Skin−Over Grease
Special non−conductive grease (Toro Part Number
505−165) which forms a light protective skin to help waterproof electrical switches and contacts.
Figure 2
Battery Terminal Protector
Battery Terminal Protector (Toro Part No. 107−0392) is
an aerosol spray that should be used on battery terminals to reduce corrosion problems. Apply terminal protector after battery cable has been secured to battery
terminal.
Figure 3
Electrical System
Page 6 − 2
Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Battery Hydrometer
Use the Battery Hydrometer when measuring specific
gravity of battery electrolyte. Obtain this tool locally.
Electrical
System
Figure 4
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 3
Electrical System
Troubleshooting
For effective troubleshooting and repairs, you must
have a good understanding of the electrical circuits and
components used on this machine (see Chapter 8 −
Electrical Diagrams).
CAUTION
Remove all jewelry, especially rings and
watches, before doing any electrical troubleshooting or testing. Disconnect the battery
cables unless the test requires battery voltage.
If the machine has any interlock switches by−passed,
they must be reconnected for proper troubleshooting
and safety.
NOTE: Use the Standard Control Module input and output LED’s when troubleshooting a Groundsmaster
3505−D electrical problem.
Starting Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Starter solenoid clicks, but starter will not crank
(if solenoid clicks, problem is not in safety interlock
system).
Battery charge is low.
Battery cables are loose or corroded.
Battery ground to frame is loose or corroded.
Wiring at starter is faulty.
Starter solenoid is faulty.
Starter mounting bolts are loose or not supplying a
sufficient ground for solenoid.
Starter is faulty.
Engine cranks, but does not start.
Fuel tank empty.
Engine run solenoid is faulty (Groundsmaster 3280−D).
Glow plugs are faulty (Groundsmaster 3280−D).
Engine and/or fuel may be too cold.
Engine or fuel system is malfunctioning (see Chapter
3 − Engine or Chapter − Diesel Engine).
Standard Control Module is faulty.
Engine cranks (but should not) with the traction pedal
out of the neutral position.
Electrical System
Traction neutral switch is out of adjustment or faulty.
Traction neutral switch wiring is faulty.
Page 6 − 4
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Starting Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Nothing happens when start attempt is made (either
seat switch OR parking brake must be engaged for
successful start).
PTO switch is ON (pulled out) or is faulty.
Traction pedal is not in neutral position.
Interlock system has problem.
Battery cables are loose or corroded.
Battery ground to frame is loose or corroded.
Battery is dead.
Engine fuse (15 amp) is open.
Fusible link is open.
Wiring to start circuit components is loose, corroded or
damaged (see Wiring Schematics).
Traction neutral switch is out of adjustment or faulty.
Ignition switch is faulty.
Fuse block is faulty.
High temperature shutdown switch is faulty.
Starter solenoid is faulty.
Electrical
System
Standard Control Module is faulty.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 5
Electrical System
General Run and Operating Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Engine continues to run (but should not) when the
traction pedal is depressed with no operator on the
seat.
Seat switch is faulty.
Seat switch wiring is loose, corroded or damaged.
Traction neutral switch is out of adjustment or faulty.
Engine kills when the traction pedal is depressed or
the P.T.O. switch is pulled ON with the operator in the
seat.
Operator is lifting off the seat (seat switch not
depressed fully).
Parking brake is on.
Seat switch is faulty.
Seat switch wiring is loose, corroded or damaged.
Battery does not charge.
Wiring to the charging circuit components is loose,
corroded or damaged (see Wiring Schematics in
Chapter 11 − Electrical Diagrams).
Alternator belt is loose or damaged.
Fusible link to the battery is faulty.
Alternator is faulty.
Battery is faulty.
Engine kills during operation (operator sitting on seat).
Operator is lifting off the seat (seat switch not
depressed fully).
Seat switch is faulty.
Seat switch wiring is loose, corroded or damaged.
Engine is overheated.
Ignition switch is faulty.
Wiring to the run circuit components is damaged or
disconnected (see Wiring Schematics in Chapter 11 −
Electrical Diagrams).
Standard Control Module is faulty.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 6
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
General Run and Operating Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Engine Continues to run (but should not) when the
PTO switch is ON with no operator in the seat.
Seat switch is faulty.
Seat switch wiring is loose, corroded or damaged.
Traction neutral switch is out of adjustment or faulty.
P.T.O. clutch does not engage.
System fuse F1 (15 amp) or F3 (10 amp) is open.
Logic power fuse F4 (2 amp) is open.
Fuse block is faulty.
P.T.O. switch is faulty.
P.T.O. latch relay is faulty.
Electric clutch wiring is loose, corroded or damaged.
Electrical
System
Electric clutch is out of adjustment or faulty.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 7
Electrical System
Electrical System Quick Checks
Battery Test (Open Circuit Test)
Use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage.
Voltage Measured
Battery Charge Level
Set the multimeter to the DC volts setting. The battery
should be at a temperature of 60o to 100o F (16o to 38o
C). The ignition key should be in the OFF position and
all accessories turned off. Connect the positive (+) multimeter lead to the positive battery post and the negative
(−) multimeter lead to the negative battery post. Record
the battery voltage.
12.68 v (or higher)
Fully charged (100%)
12.45 v
75% charged
12.24 v
50% charged
12.06 v
25% charged
11.89 v
0% charged
NOTE: This test provides a relative condition of the battery. Load testing of the battery will provide additional
and more accurate information.
Charging System Test
This is a simple test used to determine if a charging system is functioning. It will tell you if the charging system
has an output, but not its capacity.
NOTE: Depending upon the condition of the battery
charge and battery temperature, the charging system
voltage will increase at different rates as the battery
charges.
Tool required: Digital multimeter set to DC volts.
Test instructions: Connect the positive (+) multimeter
lead to the positive battery post and the negative (−)
multimeter lead to the negative battery post. Keep the
test leads connected to the battery posts and record the
battery voltage.
NOTE: Upon starting the engine, the battery voltage
will drop and then should increase once the engine is
running.
Start the engine and run at high idle (3200 RPM). Allow
the battery to charge for at least 3 minutes. Record the
battery voltage.
Test results should be (example):
At least 0.50 volt over initial battery voltage.
Initial Battery Voltage
= 12.30 v
Battery Voltage after 3 Minute Charge
= 12.85 v
Difference
= +0.55 v
Glow Plug System Test (Groundsmaster 3280−D)
This is a fast, simple test that can help to determine the
integrity and operation of the Groundsmaster 3280−D
glow plug system. The test should be run anytime hard
starting (cold engine) is encountered on a diesel engine
equipped with a glow plug system.
Tool(s) required: Digital multimeter and/or inductive
Ammeter (AC/DC Current Transducer).
Test instructions: Properly connect the ammeter to the
digital multimeter (refer to manufacturers’ instructions).
Electrical System
Set the multimeter to the correct scale. With the ignition
switch in the OFF position, place the ammeter pickup
around the main glow plug power supply wire and read
the meter prior to activating the glow plug system. Adjust
the meter to read zero (if applicable). Cycle the glow
plug system at least two times (per instructions in Traction Unit Operator’s Manual) and record the final results.
The Groundsmaster 3280−D glow plug system should
have a reading of approximately 27 Amps. If low current
reading is observed, one (or more) glow plugs is faulty.
Page 6 − 8
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Check Operation of Interlock Switches
CAUTION
Electrical
System
Do not disconnect interlock switches. They are
for the operator’s protection. Check the operation of the interlock switches daily for proper operation. Replace any malfunctioning switches
before operating the machine.
Interlock switch operation is described in the Traction
Unit Operator’s Manual. The Groundsmaster 3280−D
and Groundsmaster 3320 are equipped with a Standard
Control Module which monitors interlock switch operation. Information on this Module is described in the Traction Unit Operator’s Manual and in the Component
Testing section of this Chapter. Testing of individual interlock switches is included in the Component Testing
section of this Chapter.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 9 Rev. A
Electrical System
Component Testing
For accurate resistance and/or continuity checks, electrically disconnect the component being tested from the
circuit (e.g. unplug the ignition switch connector before
doing a continuity check).
NOTE: See the Kubota Workshop Manual: 05 Series
Engine (Groundsmaster 3280−D) or Briggs & Stratton/
Daihatsu Engine Repair Manual (Groundsmaster 3320)
for additional electrical component repair information.
NOTE: Electrical troubleshooting of any 12 Volt power
connection can be performed through voltage drop tests
without disconnecting the component.
CAUTION
When testing electrical components for continuity with a multimeter (ohms setting), make sure
that power to the circuit has been disconnected.
Ignition Switch
The ignition (key) switch has three positions (OFF, ON,
and START). The terminals are marked as shown in Figure 5. The circuit wiring of the ignition switch is shown
in the chart below. With the use of a multimeter (ohms
setting), the switch functions may be tested to determine
whether continuity exists between the various terminals
for each position. Verify continuity between switch terminals.
ON
OFF
45o
45o
START
F
A
E
B
C
POSITION
CIRCUIT
OFF
NONE
ON
B + C + F, D + E
START
D
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
Figure 5
A+B+C
The Standard Control Module monitors the operation of
the ignition switch. If the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Module Power input LED should be illuminated.
If the ignition switch is in the START position, both the
Module Power input and Start input LEDs should be illuminated.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 10
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Indicator Lights
Charge Indicator Light
3
The charge indicator light should come on when the ignition switch is in the ON position with the engine not running. Also, it should illuminate with an improperly
operating charging circuit while the engine is running.
2
Engine Oil Pressure Light
4
The engine oil pressure light should come on when the
ignition switch is in the ON position with the engine not
running. Also, it should illuminate with the engine running if the engine oil pressure drops to an unsafe level.
IMPORTANT: If the oil pressure indicator light is illuminated with the engine running, shut off the engine immediately.
1
Figure 6
1. Glow plug indicator
2. High temp warning
3. Engine oil pressure
4. Charge indicator
5
To test the oil pressure light and circuit wiring, ground the
wire attached to oil pressure switch located on the engine near the oil filter. Turn ignition switch to the ON position; the engine oil pressure light should come on
indicating correct operation of the indicator light and circuit wiring.
2
High Temperature Warning Light
3
6
1
4
To test the high temperature warning light and circuit wiring, turn ignition switch to the ON position and ground
the yellow wire attached to high temperature sender located on the engine water pump housing (see Temperature Sender in this Chapter). The indicator light should
illuminate.
1B (−)
1A (+)
2B (−)
2A (+)
Figure 7
Glow Plug Indicator Light
The glow plug light on Groundsmaster 3280−D machines should come on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position prior to placing the ignition
switch in START. The light should stay lit for approximately 6 seconds while the ignition switch is left in the
ON position.
1. Glow plug indicator
2. High temp warning
3. Engine oil pressure
4. Charge indicator
5. Warning light front
6. Warning light back
Testing Indicator Lights
1. Apply 12 VDC to terminals 1A and 2A (Fig. 7).
2. Ground terminals 1B and 2B (Fig. 7).
3. Both indicator lights should illuminate.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 11
Electrical System
Electrical
System
If the engine coolant temperature reaches 221oF
(105oC) (approximate), the high temperature warning
light should come on.
Hour Meter
1. Connect the positive (+) terminal of a 12 VDC source
to the positive (+) terminal of the hour meter.
Hobbs
2. Connect the negative (−) terminal of the voltage
source to the other terminal of the hour meter.
QUARTZ
00001
HOURS
3. The hour meter should move a 1/10 of an hour in six
minutes.
1
10
+
4. Disconnect the voltage source from the hour meter.
BACK
Figure 8
P.T.O. Switch
The P.T.O. switch is mounted on the control panel and
is pulled to engage the P.T.O. electric clutch.
The Standard Control Module monitors the operation of
the P.T.O. switch. If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the P.T.O. switch is pulled out, the Module P.T.O.
switch input LED should be illuminated.
Testing
2
When the switch knob is pulled out to engage the P.T.O.,
the COM B and middle switch terminals should have
continuity (Fig. 10). COM B and NC should not have
continuity.
1
Figure 9
1. Control panel
2. P.T.O. switch
When the switch knob is pushed in, the outside switch
terminals (COM B and NC) should have continuity (Fig.
10). COM B and middle switch terminals should not
have continuity.
1
2
3
Figure 10
1. COM B terminal
2. Middle terminal
Electrical System
Page 6 − 12
3. NC terminal
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Temperature Sender
The temperature sender is attached to the water pump
housing on the engine. There is a yellow wire attached
to the temperature sender.
If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the temperature sender has reduced resistance due to high coolant
temperature, the High Temperature Warning indicator
light on the console and the Over Temperature Warning
input LED on the Standard Control Module should be illuminated.
Testing
4. Install sender to the engine housing.
A. Clean threads of housing and sender thoroughly.
Apply thread sealant to the threads of the sender.
B. Thread sender into the housing. Torque sender
from 16 to 20 ft−lb (21.7 to 27.1 N−m).
C. Reconnect wire to sender.
5. Fill engine cooling system (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
CAUTION
Make sure engine is cool before removing the
temperature sender from engine.
1
1. Lower the coolant level in the engine and remove the
temperature sender from the engine.
2. Put the end of the sender in a container of oil with a
thermometer and slowly heat the oil (Fig. 13).
Figure 11
1. Temperature sender (gasoline engine)
CAUTION
NOTE: Prior to taking resistance readings with a digital
multimeter, short the meter test leads together. The meter will display a small resistance value (usually 0.5
ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal resistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this value
from from the measured value of the component you are
testing.
1
Electrical
System
Handle the hot oil with extreme care to prevent
personal injury or fire.
Figure 12
1. Temperature sender (diesel engine)
3. Check resistance of the sender with a multimeter
(ohms setting) as the temperature increases.
A. The meter should indicate more than 600 ohms at
70oF (21oC).
B. The meter should indicate approximately 460
ohms at 100oF (38oC).
C. The meter should indicate from 54 to 78 ohms at
200oF (93oC).
D. Replace sender if specifications are not met.
Figure 13
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 13
Electrical System
High Temperature Shutdown Switch
The high temperature shutdown switch is located on the
water pump housing. There is a blue/white wire attached to the shutdown switch.
The Standard Control Module monitors the operation of
the high temperature shutdown switch. If the ignition
switch is in the ON position and the high temperature
shutdown switch has closed due to excessive coolant
temperature, the Module Over Temperature Shutdown
input LED should be illuminated and the engine should
shut down.
Testing
6. After testing is complete, install switch to the engine
housing.
A. Clean threads of housing and switch thoroughly.
Apply thread sealant to the threads of the switch.
B. Thread switch into the housing. Torque switch
from 16 to 20 ft−lb (21.7 to 27.1 N−m).
C. Reconnect wire to switch.
7. Fill engine cooling system (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
CAUTION
Make sure engine is cool before removing the
temperature switch from engine.
1. Lower the coolant level in the engine and remove the
high temperature shutdown switch from the engine.
2. Put the end of the switch in a container of oil with a
thermometer and slowly heat the oil (Fig. 16).
1
Figure 14
1. High temperature switch (gasoline engine)
CAUTION
Handle the hot oil with extreme care to prevent
personal injury or fire.
3. Check resistance of the switch with a multimeter
(ohms setting) as the oil temperature increases. The
high temperature shutdown switch is normally open.
A. On the Groundsmaster 3280−D (diesel engine),
the high temperature shutdown switch should close
between 225o and 235oF (107o and 113oC).
1
Figure 15
1. High temperature switch (diesel engine)
B. On the Groundsmaster 3320 (gasoline engine),
the high temperature shutdown switch should close
at approximately 238oF (114oC).
4. Allow oil to cool while observing temperature.
A. On the Groundsmaster 3280−D (diesel engine),
the high temperature shutdown switch should open
at approximately 219oF (104oC).
B. On the Groundsmaster 3320 (gasoline engine),
the high temperature shutdown switch should open
at approximately 232oF (111oC).
Figure 16
5. Replace switch if specifications are not met.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 14
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Oil Pressure Switch
The engine oil pressure switch is located on the engine
near the oil filter (Figs.17 and 18). The oil pressure
switch is a normally closed switch that opens with pressure.
On the Groundsmaster 3280−D (diesel engine), the oil
pressure switch should open at approximately 8 PSI
(0.56 kg/cm2).
On the Groundsmaster 3320 (gasoline engine), the oil
pressure switch should open between 2.9 to 5.7 PSI (0.2
to 0.4 kg/cm2).
IMPORTANT: If the oil pressure indicator light is illuminated with the engine running, shut off the engine immediately. Check the indicator light, circuit
wiring, pressure switch and engine lubrication system to identify the cause of the illuminated indicator
light.
1
Figure 17
Testing
1. Oil pressure switch (diesel engine)
NOTE: Refer to engine service manual for information
regarding engine lubrication system and testing.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The oil
pressure indicator light on the control panel should be
illuminated.
2. If the light is not on, disconnect the wire from the oil
pressure switch and ground the wire to the engine block.
1
3. If the light comes on, the oil pressure switch is faulty.
Electrical
System
4. If the light does not come on after step 2, check the
circuit wiring and indicator light (see Engine Oil Pressure Light in this section).
Figure 18
1. Oil pressure switch (gasoline engine)
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 15
Electrical System
Standard Control Module
The Groundsmaster 3280−D and Groundsmaster 3320
are equipped with a Standard Control Module to monitor
and control electrical components required for safe operation. This Module is located under the control panel
(Fig. 19).
Inputs from the ignition, neutral, parking brake, P.T.O.,
seat, temperature sender and high temperature shutdown switches are monitored by the Module. Current
output to the P.T.O. (electric clutch), electric starter motor and engine components (fuel pump, diesel engine
run solenoid and gasoline engine ignition) are controlled
based on the inputs received by the Module.
The Standard Control Module does not connect to an
external computer or hand held device, can not be re−
programmed and does not record intermittent fault data.
The Standard Control Module can be used to check operation of machine switches by monitoring the Module
LEDs. If a Module LED does not illuminate (e.g. the in
seat input LED does not illuminate with the seat occupied and the ignition switch in the ON position), testing
of the switch and circuit wiring would be required.
Control Module Outputs (Fig. 20)
The Start output LED should be illuminated when the
ignition key switch is in the START position with the traction pedal in neutral, the P.T.O. switch off and either the
seat occupied or parking brake engaged.
The Run output LED should be illuminated when the
ignition key switch is in the ON position and inputs from
the neutral, parking brake, P.T.O., seat and over temperature switches indicate safe engine operation (e.g. seat
occupied and parking brake disengaged when traction
pedal is depressed).
The P.T.O. output LED should be illuminated when the
ignition key switch is in the ON position and the P.T.O.
switch is pulled out. Note: If Module Over Temperature
Warning input LED is illuminated, P.T.O. output LED will
not be illuminated and P.T.O. will not be engaged regardless of P.T.O. switch position.
1
2
Refer to the Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for additional Standard Control Module information.
Control Module Inputs (Fig. 20)
The Power input LED should be illuminated when the
ignition key switch is in the ON or START position.
Figure 19
1. Standard Control Module
The Neutral input LED should be illuminated when the
traction pedal is in the neutral position.
12
The Parking Brake Off input LED should be illuminated
when the parking brake is not engaged.
The In Seat input LED should be illuminated when the
operator is sitting in the seat.
11
4
9
3
8
2
7
6
The Over Temperature Warning input LED should be illuminated when the temperature sender has reduced
resistance due to high engine coolant temperature.
5
10
The P.T.O. Switch input LED should be illuminated when
the P.T.O. switch is engaged (pulled out).
The Over Temperature Shutdown input LED should be
illuminated when excessive engine coolant temperature
causes the high temperature shutdown switch to close.
2. Fuse block
N
The Start input LED should be illuminated when the ignition key switch is in the START position.
1
Figure 20
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Power input LED
Start input LED
Engine run output LED
Start output LED
PTO output LED
Neutral input LED
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Park brake off input LED
PTO switch input LED
In seat input LED
Temp shutdn input LED
Temp warning input LED
Backlap input LED
The Backlap input LED is not used on the Groundsmaster 3280−D or 3320.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 16
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Traction Neutral Switch
The traction neutral switch is a normally open proximity
switch that closes when the traction pedal is in the neutral position. A socket head screw threaded into the hydrostat neutral return arm acts as the sensing plate for
the switch.
2
The Standard Control Module monitors the operation of
the traction neutral switch. If the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the traction pedal is in the neutral position, the Module Neutral input LED should be illuminated.
1
Testing
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
Figure 21
1. Neutral switch
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the neutral
switch.
2
2. Neutral return arm
.125”
(3.2 mm)
3. Check the continuity of the switch by connecting a
multimeter (ohms setting) across the connector terminals.
1
4. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, slowly
push the traction pedal in the forward and reverse direction while watching the multimeter. Continuity should be
broken in both the forward and reverse directions.
3
5. Allow the traction pedal to return to the neutral position. There should be continuity across the terminals.
Figure 22
1. Neutral switch
2. Socket head screw
Adjustment
3. Neutral return arm
Electrical
System
6. Reconnect electrical connector to the neutral switch.
1. Before adjusting the traction neutral switch, check
and adjust traction system neutral position (see Traction
Unit Operator’s Manual).
IMPORTANT: To prevent traction neutral switch
damage, make sure that end of socket head screw
does not contact switch.
2. Loosen jam nut on socket head screw.
3. Rotate socket head screw so the clearance between
end of the socket head screw and neutral switch is .125”
(3.2 mm) (Fig. 22).
4. Torque jam nut from 71 to 89 in−lb (8 to 10 N−m) to
secure adjustment. After jam nut is tightened, make
sure that clearance between socket head screw and
neutral switch has not changed.
5. Check for proper switch operation (see Testing
above).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 17
Electrical System
Seat Switch
The seat switch is normally open and closes when the
operator is on the seat. If the traction system or P.T.O.
switch is engaged when the operator raises out of the
seat, the engine will stop. The seat switch (Fig. 23) and
its electrical connector are located directly under the
seat. Testing of the switch can be done without seat removal by disconnecting the seat wire from the machine
wiring harness.
1
The Standard Control Module monitors the operation of
the seat switch. If the ignition switch is in the ON position
and the seat is occupied, the Module in seat input LED
should be illuminated.
2
Figure 23
Testing
1. Electrical connector
2. Standard seat switch
1. Make sure the engine is off. Locate switch for testing.
2. Disconnect electrical connector from the seat switch.
3. Check the continuity of the switch by connecting a
multimeter (ohms setting) across the connector terminals.
4. With no pressure on the seat, there should be no
continuity between the seat switch terminals.
5. Press directly onto the seat switch through the seat
cushion. There should be continuity as the seat cushion
approaches the bottom of its travel.
6. Reconnect switch connector.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 18
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Parking Brake Switch
The switch used for the parking brake is a normally open
switch. The switch closes when the parking brake is disengaged. The parking brake switch is located under the
steering tower cover (Fig. 24).
6
1
2
5
The Standard Control Module monitors the operation of
the parking brake switch. If the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the parking brake is disengaged, the
Module Parking Brake Off input LED should be illuminated.
3
4
Testing
1. Make sure the engine is off. Locate switch for testing.
2. Disconnect electrical connector from the switch.
3. Check the continuity of the switch by connecting a
multimeter (ohms setting) across the connector terminals.
4. When the switch plunger is extended there should
not be continuity between the switch terminals.
Figure 24
1. Parking brake switch
2. Flat washer (2 used)
3. Phillips screw (2 used)
4. Parking brake rod
5. Switch actuator
6. Nut (2 used)
5. When the switch plunger is depressed, there should
be continuity between the switch terminals.
Electrical
System
6. Reconnect switch connector.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 19
Electrical System
P.T.O. Electric Clutch
An electric clutch is used to engage the P.T.O. The electric clutch is mounted on the engine crankshaft and engages when current is applied to the clutch. The clutch
also incorporates a magnetic brake to stop clutch rotation when the clutch is de−energized.
3
1
Testing
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch. Raise hood.
2. Locate electric clutch on engine crankshaft (Fig. 25).
Unplug clutch connector from machine wire harness.
2
3. For accurate clutch resistance measuring, clutch
should be at approximately 70oF (21oC).
NOTE: Prior to taking small resistance readings with a
digital multimeter, short the meter test leads together.
The meter will display a small resistance value (usually
0.5 ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal
resistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this value from from the measured value of the component you
are testing.
Figure 25
1. P.T.O. clutch
2. Access slot
3. Lock nut
4. Using a multimeter (ohms setting), verify clutch coil
resistance between the two terminals of the clutch wire
connector. Coil resistance should be approximately 3.0
ohms. Additionally, check that there is no continuity between either of the clutch wire connector terminals and
the clutch frame.
5. Using access slots in clutch cover, measure gap between clutch rotor and armature (Fig. 25). Gap should
be from .012” to .024” (.3 to .6 mm) at all three access
slots. If gap is incorrect, loosen or tighten three (3) lock
nuts evenly to achieve correct, uniform gap.
6. As an additional test, apply 12 volts to the terminals
of the clutch. The clutch should engage. If clutch does
not engage when voltage is applied, replace clutch.
7. If clutch removal is necessary, see P.T.O. Electric
Clutch in the Service and Repairs section of this chapter.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 20
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Fuses
The fuse block is located under the control panel (Fig.
26).
1
Identification and Function
The fuses are held in the fuse block. Use Figure 27 to
identify each individual fuse and its correct amperage.
Each fuse holder has the following function.
Fuse 1 (15 Amp): Protects main power circuit to ignition switch terminal B
Fuse 2 (10 Amp): Protects power circuit from ignition switch terminal S.
Figure 26
1. Fuse block
Fuse 3 (10 Amp): Protects power circuit from ignition switch terminal I.
2
10A
1
15A
3
10A
Testing
4
2A
Fuse 4 (2 Amp): Protects power supply to Standard
Control Module.
Remove fuses from the fuse block for testing. Fuse
should have continuity between fuse terminals.
Figure 27
Fusible Link Harness
The Groundsmaster 3280−D and 3320−D use three (3)
fusible links for circuit protection. These fusible links are
located in a harness that connects the starter B+ terminal to the main wire harness (Fig. 28). If any of these
links should fail, current to the protected circuit will
cease. Refer to wire harness drawings in Chapter 11 −
Electrical Diagrams for additional fusible link information.
Use a multimeter to make sure that continuity exists between each terminal pin in connector P1 and connector
J1 at the starter (Fig. 29). If any of the fusible links are
open, replace the complete harness.
Electrical
System
1
2
Figure 28
1. Starter motor
2. Fusible link harness
FUSIBLE LINK
FUSIBLE LINK
FUSIBLE LINK
Figure 29
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 21
Electrical System
Fuel Stop Solenoid (Groundsmaster 3280−D)
The fuel stop solenoid used on the Groundsmaster
3280−D (diesel engine) must be energized for the diesel
engine to run. The solenoid is mounted to the injection
pump on the engine (Fig. 30).
2
In Place Testing
NOTE: Prior to taking small resistance readings with a
digital multimeter, short the test leads together. The meter will display a small resistance value (usually 0.5
ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal resistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this value
from the measured value of the component you are testing.
1
Figure 30
1. Injection pump
2. Fuel stop solenoid
1. Disconnect wire harness connector from solenoid.
2
2. Using a digital multimeter, touch one test lead to the
pull coil terminal and the other test lead to the fuel stop
solenoid frame (ground) (Fig. 31). The resistance of the
pull coil should be less than 1 ohm (but not zero).
1
3. Using a digital multimeter, touch one test lead to the
hold coil terminal and the other test lead to the fuel stop
solenoid frame (ground) (Fig. 31). The resistance of the
hold coil should be approximately 15 ohms.
3
4. Connect solenoid to the wiring harness.
Figure 31
1. Fuel stop solenoid
2. Pull coil terminal
Live testing
3. Hold coil terminal
1. Disconnect wire harness connector from solenoid.
NOTE: The solenoid may be removed from the engine
or tested in place.
2. If the solenoid is removed from the engine, make
sure that the solenoid plunger moves freely and is free
of dirt, debris and corrosion.
NOTE: When testing run solenoid, use test leads with
at least 14 gauge wire.
3. Connect a positive (+) test lead from a 12 VDC
source to the pull coil and hold coil terminals.
4. Touch a negative (−) test lead from the 12 VDC
source to the fuel stop solenoid frame (ground) (Fig. 31).
The solenoid should engage, making an audible “click,”
and the plunger should retract.
5. Remove positive (+) voltage from the pull coil terminal. The solenoid should stay engaged.
6. Remove positive (+) voltage from the hold coil terminal. The solenoid should release.
7. Reconnect the wires to the solenoid.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 22
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Glow Controller (Groundsmaster 3280−D)
The glow controller used on the Groundsmaster
3280−D (diesel engine) is located under the control
panel.
5. If any of the conditions in Step 3 are not met or power
to terminal 1 exists and any of the other conditions in
Step 4 are not met:
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 11 − Electrical Diagrams when
troubleshooting the glow controller circuit.
A. Verify continuity of the circuitry from the battery to
the glow relay and glow plugs (see Chapter 11 −
Electrical Diagrams).
Controller Operation
1. When the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position, the controller energizes the glow plugs and lights
up the glow lamp for approximately 6 seconds.
B. Verify continuity of the circuitry from the battery to
ignition switch, glow controller, glow lamp, glow relay
and ground (see Chapter 11 − Electrical Diagrams).
C. Replace parts as necessary.
2. When the ignition switch is held in the START position, the glow plugs will energize while the switch is held
in START and the glow lamp will not light.
6. Connect electrical connector to the fuel stop solenoid.
3. When the ignition switch is released from START to
RUN, the glow plugs will de−energize and the glow lamp
will remain off.
2
Controller Checks
3
6
1. Make sure there is power from the battery.
2
5
1
4
2. Disconnect electrical connector to the fuel stop solenoid to prevent the engine from starting.
3. Place ignition switch in the RUN position. Verify the
following while in the RUN position:
1
A. Glow indicator lamp is on.
3
B. Glow relay is energized.
C. Glow plugs are energized.
Figure 32
3. Side view
Electrical
System
D. Glow indicator lamp goes out and glow plugs de−
energize after approximately 6 seconds.
1. Glow controller end view
2. Top view
4. Place ignition switch in the START position. Verify
the following while in the START position:
A. Glow indicator lamp is out.
B. Glow relay is energized.
C. Glow plugs are energized.
D. Power exists at terminal 1 of the glow controller.
NOTE: If there is no power to terminal 1 of the glow controller, verify continuity of the circuitry from the ignition
switch to the glow controller and perform Step 4 again
(see Chapter 11 − Electrical Diagrams).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 23
Electrical System
Glow Relay (Groundsmaster 3280−D)
The glow relay used on the Groundsmaster 3280−D
(diesel engine) is attached to the support bracket inside
the right side frame near the fuel/water filter (Fig. 33).
When energized, the glow relay allows electrical current
to the engine glow plugs.
2
Testing
NOTE: Prior to taking small resistance readings with a
digital multimeter, short the meter test leads together.
The meter will display a small resistance value (usually
0.5 ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal
resistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this value from from the measured value of the component you
are testing.
1
Figure 33
1. Frame
2. Glow relay
1. Verify coil resistance between terminals 85 and 86
with a multimeter (ohms setting). Resistance should be
approximately 72 ohms.
2. Connect multimeter (ohms setting) leads to relay terminals 30 and 87. Ground terminal 86 and apply +12
VDC to terminal 85. The relay should make and break
continuity between terminals 30 and 87 as +12 VDC is
applied and removed from terminal 85.
30
85
86
87
3. Disconnect voltage and leads from the relay terminals.
86
87
85
30
Figure 34
Electrical System
Page 6 − 24
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Fuel Pump (Groundsmaster 3280−D)
The fuel pump used on the Groundsmaster 3280−D
(diesel engine) is attached to the support bracket inside
the right side frame near the fuel/water filter (Fig. 35).
4
3
IMPORTANT: When testing fuel pump, make sure
that pump is not operated without fuel.
DANGER
5
Because diesel fuel is highly flammable, use caution when handling it. Do not smoke while testing
the fuel pump. Do not test fuel pump while engine
is hot. Make sure that there is adequate ventilation when testing. Always wipe up any spilled
fuel before starting the engine.
6
2
7
1
Figure 35
Fuel Pump Capacity Test
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine and engage parking brake.
2. Disconnect electrical connector from the engine fuel
stop solenoid to prevent the engine from firing.
3. Disconnect fuel pump discharge hose from the water
separator inlet fitting (Fig. 35).
4. Make sure fuel hoses attached to the fuel pump are
free of obstructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fuel hose (from tank)
Fuel filter
Fuel pump
Pump discharge hose
5. Fuel hose (to engine)
6. Inlet fitting
7. Water/fuel filter
Fuel Pump Specifications
Pump Capacity
Pressure
Max. Current
Draw
23.5 fl oz/min (695 ml/min)
3.3 psi (22.8 kPa)
0.9 amp
Electrical
System
5. Place disconnected pump discharge hose into a
large, graduated cylinder sufficient enough to collect 1
quart (0.95 liter).
IMPORTANT: When testing the fuel pump, DO NOT
turn ignition switch to START.
6. Collect fuel in the graduated cylinder by turning ignition switch ON. Allow pump to run for 30 seconds, then
turn ignition switch to OFF.
7. The amount of fuel collected in the graduated cylinder should be approximately 11.75 fl oz (350 ml) after 30
seconds.
8. Replace fuel pump if necessary. Install fuel hose to
the water separator.
9. Reconnect electrical connector to the engine run solenoid.
10.Bleed the fuel system (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 25 Rev. A
Electrical System
Fuel Pump (Groundsmaster 3320)
The fuel pump used on the Groundsmaster 3320 (gasoline engine) is attached to the support bracket inside the
right side frame near the fuel filter (Fig. 36).
IMPORTANT: When testing fuel pump, make sure
that pump is not operated without fuel.
5
4
DANGER
2
Because gasoline is highly flammable, use caution when handling it. Do not smoke while testing
the fuel pump. Do not test fuel pump while engine
is hot. Make sure that there is adequate ventilation when testing. Always wipe up any spilled
fuel before starting the engine.
1
3
Figure 36
Fuel Pump Capacity Test
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine and engage parking brake.
2. Disconnect fuel pump discharge hose from the carburetor inlet (Fig. 36).
3. Make sure fuel hoses attached to the fuel pump are
free of obstructions.
1. Fuel hose (from tank)
2. Fuel filter
3. Fuel hose
4. Fuel pump
5. Fuel hose (to engine)
Fuel Pump Specifications
Pump Capacity
27 fl oz/min
(800 ml/min)
Pressure
2.8 − 4.3 psi
(19.6 − 29.4 kPa)
4. Place disconnected pump discharge hose into a
large, graduated cylinder sufficient enough to collect 1
quart (.95 liter).
IMPORTANT: When testing the fuel pump, DO NOT
turn ignition switch to START.
5. Collect fuel in the graduated cylinder by turning ignition switch ON. Allow pump to run for 30 seconds, then
release ignition switch to OFF.
6. The amount of fuel collected in the graduated cylinder should be approximately 13.5 fl oz (400 ml) after 30
seconds.
7. Replace fuel pump if necessary. Install fuel hose to
carburetor inlet.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 26 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Fuel Pump Relay (Groundsmaster 3320)
The Groundsmaster 3320 uses a relay to energize the
fuel pump. The fuel pump relay is attached to the support bracket inside the right side frame near the fuel filter.
86
87A
87
Testing
NOTE: Prior to taking small resistance readings with a
digital multimeter, short the meter test leads together.
The meter will display a small resistance value (usually
0.5 ohms or less). This resistance is due to the internal
resistance of the meter and test leads. Subtract this value from the measured value of the component you are
testing.
85
30
Figure 37
1. Locate relay and disconnect the machine wire harness connector from the relay.
2. Using a multimeter (ohms setting), measure coil resistance between terminals 85 and 86 (Fig. 37). Resistance should be between 70 and 90 ohms.
3. Connect multimeter (ohms setting) leads to relay terminals 30 and 87. Ground terminal 86 and apply +12
VDC to terminal 85. The relay should make and break
continuity between terminals 30 and 87 as +12 VDC is
applied and removed from terminal 85.
4. Disconnect voltage from terminal 85 and multimeter
lead from terminal 87.
5. Connect multimeter (ohms setting) leads to relay terminals 30 and 87A. Apply +12 VDC to terminal 85. The
relay should make and break continuity between terminals 30 and 87A as +12 VDC is applied and removed
from terminal 85.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 27
Electrical
System
6. Disconnect voltage and multimeter leads from the
relay terminals. Connect relay to machine wire harness.
Electrical System
Service and Repairs
NOTE: See the Kubota Workshop Manual: 05 Series
Engine (Groundsmaster 3280−D) or the Briggs & Stratton/Daihatsu Engine Repair Manual (Groundsmaster
3320) for additional component repair information.
Battery Storage
If the machine will be stored for more than 30 days:
1. Remove the battery and charge it fully (see Battery
Service).
4. Store battery in a cool atmosphere to avoid quick deterioration of the battery charge.
5. To help prevent the battery from freezing, make sure
it is fully charged (see Battery Service).
2. Either store battery on a shelf or on the machine.
3. Leave cables disconnected if the battery is stored on
the machine.
Battery Care
1. Battery electrolyte level must be properly maintained. The top of the battery must be kept clean. lf the
machine is stored in a location where temperatures are
extremely high, the battery will run down more rapidly
than if the machine is stored in a location where temperatures are cool.
3. Battery cables must be tight on terminals to provide
good electrical contact.
WARNING
Connecting cables to the wrong post could result in personal injury and/or damage to the
electrical system.
WARNING
Wear safety goggles and rubber gloves when
working with electrolyte. Charge battery in a
well ventilated place so gasses produced
while charging can dissipate. Since the gases
are explosive, keep open flames and electrical
sparks away from the battery; do not smoke.
Nausea may result if the gases are inhaled. Unplug charger from electrical outlet before connecting or disconnecting charger leads to or
from battery posts.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove battery fill caps while
cleaning.
4. If corrosion occurs at terminals, disconnect cables.
Always disconnect negative (−) cable first. Clean
clamps and terminals separately. Reconnect cables
with positive (+) cable first. Coat battery posts and cable
connectors with Battery Terminal Protector (Toro Part
No. 107−0392) or petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion.
5. Check electrolyte level every 25 operating hours,
and every 30 days if machine is in storage.
6. Maintain cell level with distilled or demineralized water. Do not fill cells above the fill line.
2. Check battery condition weekly or after every 50
hours of operation. Keep terminals and entire battery
case clean because a dirty battery will discharge slowly.
A. Clean battery by washing entire case with a solution of baking soda and water. Rinse with clear water.
B. Coat battery posts and cable connectors with
Battery Terminal Protector (Toro Part No. 107−0392)
or petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 28
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Battery Service
The battery is the heart of the electrical system. With
regular and proper service, battery life can be extended.
Additionally, battery and electrical component failure
can be prevented.
8
7
6
CAUTION
+
−
1
5
4
When working with batteries, use extreme caution to avoid splashing or spilling electrolyte.
Electrolyte can destroy clothing and burn skin or
eyes. Always wear safety goggles and a face
shield when working with batteries.
3
2
Electrolyte Specific Gravity
Fully charged: 1.265 corrected to 80oF (26.7oC)
Discharged: less than 1.240
Figure 38
1.
2.
3.
4.
Battery Specifications
BCI Group Size 26
525 CCA at 0o F (−18o C)
Reserve Capacity of 80 minutes at 80oF (27oC)
Battery
Battery base
Retainer
Flat washer
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lock washer
Cap screw
Positive battery cable
Negative battery cable
Dimensions (including terminal posts)
Length
8.2 inches (20.8 cm)
Width
6.8 inches (17.3 cm)
Height
8.0 inches (20.3 cm)
IMPORTANT: Before cleaning the battery, tape or
block vent holes to the filler caps and make sure the
caps are on tightly.
Removal and Installation (Fig. 38)
C. Check for signs of wetness or leakage on the top
of the battery which might indicate a loose or missing
filler cap, overcharging, loose terminal post or overfilling. Also, check battery case for dirt and oil. Clean
the battery with a solution of baking soda and water,
then rinse it with clean water.
1. Loosen and remove negative cable from battery. After negative cable is removed, loosen and remove positive cable.
2. Loosen cap screw that secures battery retainer.
4. Install battery in reverse order making sure to connect and tighten positive cable to battery before connecting negative cable.
NOTE: Before connecting the negative (ground) cable
to the battery, connect a digital multimeter (set to DC
Amps) between the negative battery post and the negative (ground) cable connector. The reading should be
less than 0.1 amp. If the reading is 0.1 amp or more, the
machine’s electrical system should be tested and repaired.
Inspection, Maintenance and Testing
1. Perform the following inspections and maintenance:
A. Check for cracks. Replace battery if cracked or
leaking.
E. Check the electrolyte level in each cell. If the level
is below the tops of the plates in any cell, fill all cells
with distilled water between the minimum and maximum fill lines. Charge at 15 to 25 amps for 15 minutes to allow sufficient mixing of the electrolyte.
2. Conduct a hydrometer test of the battery electrolyte.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the area around the cells is
clean before opening the battery caps.
A. Measure the specific gravity of each cell with a
hydrometer. Draw electrolyte in and out of the
hydrometer barrel prior to taking a reading to warm−
up the hydrometer. At the same time take the temperature of the cell.
B. Check battery terminal posts for corrosion. Use
wire brush to clean corrosion from posts.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 29
Electrical System
Electrical
System
D. Check that the cover seal is not broken away. Replace the battery if the seal is broken or leaking.
3. Carefully remove battery from machine.
B. Temperature correct each cell reading. For each
10oF (5.5oC) above 80oF (26.7oC) add 0.004 to the
specific gravity reading. For each 10oF (5.5oC) below 80oF (26.7oC) subtract 0.004 from the specific
gravity reading.
Example: Cell Temperature
100oF
Cell Gravity
1.245
100oF minus 80oF equals 20oF
(37.7oC minus 26.7oC equals 11.0oC)
20oF multiply by 0.004/10oF equals 0.008
(11oC multiply by 0.004/5.5oC equals 0.008)
ADD (conversion above)
0.008
Correction to 80oF (26.7oC)
1.253
G. Take a voltage reading at 15 seconds, then remove the load.
H. Using the table below, determine the minimum
voltage for the cell temperature reading:
Minimum
Voltage
C. If the difference between the highest and lowest
cell specific gravity is 0.050 or greater or the lowest
cell specific gravity is less than 1.225, charge the battery. Charge at the recommended rate and time given in Charging or until all cells specific gravity is
1.225 or greater with the difference in specific gravity
between the highest and lowest cell less than 0.050.
If these charging conditions can not be met, replace
the battery.
3. Perform a high−discharge test with an adjustable
load tester.
This is one of the most reliable means of testing a battery
as it simulates the cold−cranking test. A commercial battery load tester is required to perform this test.
Battery Electrolyte
Temperature
9.6
70oF (and up)
21.1oC (and up)
9.5
60oF
15.6oC
9.4
50oF
10.0oC
9.3
40oF
4.4oC
9.1
30oF
−1.1oC
8.9
20oF
−6.7oC
8.7
10oF
−12.2oC
8.5
0oF
−17.8oC
I. If the test voltage is below the minimum, replace
the battery. If the test voltage is at or above the minimum, return the battery to service.
Charging
To minimize possible damage to the battery and allow
the battery to be fully charged, the slow charging method is presented here. This charging method can be accomplished with a constant current battery charger
which is available in most shops.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when using a battery load tester.
A. Check the voltage across the battery terminals
prior to testing the battery. If the voltage is less than
12.4 VDC, recharge the battery.
B. If the battery has been charged, apply a 150 amp
load for 15 seconds to remove the surface charge.
Use a battery load tester following the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Make sure battery terminals are free of corrosion.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when using a battery charger.
NOTE: Using specific gravity of the battery cells is the
most accurate method of determining battery condition.
1. Determine the battery charge level from either its
specific gravity or open circuit voltage.
Battery Charge
Level
Specific
Gravity
Open Circuit
Voltage
100%
1.265
12.68
75%
1.225
12.45
50%
1.190
12.24
25%
1.155
12.06
0%
1.120
11.89
D. Measure the temperature of the center cell.
E. Connect a battery load tester to the battery terminals following the manufacturer’s instructions.
Connect a digital multimeter to the battery terminals.
F. Apply a test load of one half the Cranking Performance (see Battery Specifications) rating of the battery for 15 seconds.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 30
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
2. Determine the charging time and rate using the
manufacturer’s battery charger instructions or the
following table.
Battery
Reserve
Capacity
(Minutes)
3. Following the manufacturer’s instructions, connect the charger cables to the battery. Make sure a good
connection is made.
4. Charge the battery following the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Battery Charge Level
(Percent of Fully Charged)
75%
50%
25%
0%
80 or less
3.8 hrs
@
3 amps
7.5 hrs
@
3 amps
11.3 hrs
@
3 amps
15 hrs
@
3 amps
81 to 125
5.3 hrs
@
4 amps
10.5 hrs
@
4 amps
15.8 hrs
@
4 amps
21 hrs
@
4 amps
126 to
170
5.5 hrs
@
5 amps
11 hrs
@
5 amps
16.5 hrs
@
5 amps
22 hrs
@
5 amps
171 to
250
5.8 hrs
@
6 amps
11.5 hrs
@
6 amps
17.3 hrs
@
6 amps
23 hrs
@
6 amps
above
250
6 hrs
12 hrs
18 hrs
24 hrs
@
@
@
@
10 amps 10 amps 10 amps 10 amps
5. Occasionally check the temperature of the battery
electrolyte. If the temperature exceeds 125oF (51.6oC)
or the electrolyte is violently gassing or spewing, the
charging rate must be lowered or temporarily stopped.
6. Three hours prior to the end of the charging, measure the specific gravity of a battery cell once per hour.
The battery is fully charged when the cells are gassing
freely at a low charging rate and there is less than a
0.003 change in specific gravity for three consecutive
readings.
CAUTION
Do not charge a frozen battery because it can explode and cause injury. Let the battery warm to
60oF (15.5o C) before connecting to a charger.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 6 − 31
Electrical
System
Charge the battery in a well−ventilated place to
dissipate gases produced from charging. These
gases are explosive; keep open flame and electrical spark away from the battery. Do not smoke.
Nausea may result if the gases are inhaled. Unplug the charger from the electrical outlet before
connecting or disconnecting the charger leads
from the battery posts.
Electrical System
P.T.O. Electric Clutch
Removal (Figs. 39 and 40)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
2. Unplug clutch connector from machine wire harness.
9
Antiseize
Lubricant
10
3
3. Remove P.T.O. belt from clutch and P.T.O. shaft
pulley (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
4. Remove clutch stop components using Figure 39
(Groundsmaster 3280−D) or Figure 40 (Groundsmaster
3320) as a guide.
NOTE: Hold coupler on front of engine to prevent
crankshaft from turning when removing cap screw that
secures clutch to stub shaft.
5. Remove cap screw and spacer that secure clutch to
stub shaft.
NOTE: It may be necessary to lower the rear frame and
axle assembly to allow clutch removal (see Rear Frame
and Axle Assembly Removal in the Service and Repairs
section of Chapter 7 − Chassis).
11
1
4
2
5
6
7
8
Loctite #242
Figure 39
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cap screw
Spacer
Electric clutch
Square key
Stub shaft
Flange head screw
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Loctite #242
9
8
Clutch stop
Flange nut
Diesel engine
PTO pulley
PTO belt
6
5
6. Slide clutch from shaft. Locate and retrieve square
key.
2
7
Installation (Figs. 39 and 40)
1
1. Apply antiseize lubricant to stub shaft.
3
2. Position square key in stub shaft. Slide clutch onto
shaft making sure to engage clutch stop.
NOTE: Hold coupler on front of engine to prevent
crankshaft from turning when installing cap screw that
secures clutch to stub shaft.
3. Apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads of cap
screw. Secure clutch to shaft with spacer and cap screw.
Antiseize
Lubricant
4
Figure 40
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cap screw
Spacer
Electric clutch
Stub shaft
Gasoline engine
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mounting bracket
Square key
Clutch stop
Flange head screw
4. Install clutch stop components using Figure 39
(Groundsmaster 3280−D) or Figure 40 (Groundsmaster
3320) as a guide. Make sure that clutch stop is tight
against clutch flange.
5. Check alignment between clutch pulley and P.T.O.
shaft pulley (see Align P.T.O. Pulley to Electric Clutch
Pulley in Service and Repairs section of Chapter 9 −
P.T.O. System).
6. Install P.T.O. belt to clutch and P.T.O. shaft pulley and
adjust P.T.O. belt tension (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
7. Connect clutch to machine wire harness.
Electrical System
Page 6 − 32
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chapter 7
Chassis
Table of Contents
Chassis
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Steering Tower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Rear Frame and Axle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear Axle (2 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rear Axle Service (2 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rear Wheel Bearings (2 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . 15
Operator Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Mechanical Seat Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Pneumatic Seat Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Lift Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 1
Chassis
Specifications
Item
Description
Front Tire Pressure
(23 x 9.50 − 12, 4 ply, tubeless)
20 PSI (1.38 bar)
Rear Tire Pressure (2 Wheel Drive Machines)
(16 x 6.50 − 8, 4 ply, tubeless)
20 PSI (1.38 bar)
Rear Tire Pressure (4 Wheel Drive Machines)
(18 x 6.50−8, 4 ply, tubeless)
20 PSI (1.38 bar)
Front Wheel Lug Nut Torque
75 to 80 ft−lb (102 to 108 N−m)
Rear Wheel Lug Nut Torque (2 Wheel Drive Machines)
75 to 80 ft−lb (102 to 108 N−m)
Rear Wheel Lug Nut Torque (4 Wheel Drive Machines)
70 to 90 ft−lb (95 to 122 N−m)
Chassis
Page 7 − 2
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chassis
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 3
Chassis
Service and Repairs
Wheels
7
1
2
6
75 to 80 ft−lb
(102 to 108 N−m)
RIGHT
5
3
FRONT
4
See text for torque
Figure 1
1. Rear wheel hub
2. Rear wheel assembly
3. Rear wheel lug nut (5 per wheel)
Chassis
4. Front wheel lug nut (5 per wheel)
5. Front wheel assembly
Page 7 − 4
6. Front axle
7. Rear axle (2WD shown)
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 1)
Installation (Fig. 1)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Install wheel and secure with five (5) lug nuts.
2. Tighten lug nuts evenly in a crossing pattern to the
following torque specifications:
A. Torque front lug nuts from 75 to 80 ft−lb (102 to
108 N−m).
CAUTION
When changing attachments, tires or performing other service, use correct blocks, hoists
and jacks. Make sure machine is parked on a
solid, level surface such as a concrete floor.
Prior to raising machine, remove any attachments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock or
block wheels. Use jack stands or solid wood
blocks to support the raised machine. If the machine is not properly supported by blocks or
jack stands, the machine may move or fall,
which may result in personal injury.
B. Torque rear lug nuts on 2 wheel drive machines
from 75 to 80 ft−lb (102 to 108 N−m).
C. Torque rear lug nuts on 4 wheel drive machines
from 70 to 90 ft−lb (95 to 122 N−m).
3. Lower machine to ground.
2. Chock wheels to prevent machine from shifting. Using a jack or hoist, raise machine so wheel is off ground.
Support machine with jack stands or wooden blocking
(see Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 − Safety).
Chassis
3. Remove lug nuts and remove wheel.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 5
Chassis
Steering Tower Assembly
32
30
31
24
23
25
26 17 27
20 to 26 ft−lb
(27.1 to 35.3 N−m)
29
14
28
22
21
Antiseize
Lubricant
20
19
14
18
17
12
33
16
13
15
14
3
11
34
1
35
2
RIGHT
FRONT
10
9
4
5
8
7
6
Figure 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Tower panel
Phillips head screw (6 used)
Nut retainer (6 used)
Flange head screw
Sleeve protector
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Hydraulic hose
Tilt steering lever
Grip
Chassis
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Steering control valve
Flange nut
Cap screw (2 used)
Spacer
Flange head screw
Spacer
Spring washer (4 used)
Socket head screw (4 used)
Jam nut
Flange nut (2 used)
Friction disc
Pivot plate
Page 7 − 6 Rev. A
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
Friction disc
Flat washer
Tilt bracket
Steering column
Foam collar
Steering wheel
Hex nut
Steering wheel cover
Knob
Compression spring
Parking brake rod
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 2)
Installation (Fig. 2)
1. Park the machine on a level surface, engage the
parking brake, lower the cutting deck (or implement) and
stop the engine. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
1. If removed, secure pivot plate (item 27) to steering
column with two (2) cap screws (item 15) and flange nuts
(item 22).
2. Carefully remove steering wheel cover from steering
wheel.
3. Remove hex nut that secures steering wheel to
steering column.
4. Pull steering wheel and foam collar from steering column.
5. Remove knob from end of parking brake rod.
6. Remove six (6) phillips head screws that secure tower panel to machine. Remove tower panel.
7. Remove flange head screw (item 17) and flange nut
(item 14) that secure tilt bracket (item 27) to steering
tower. Slide tilt bracket off jam nut.
8. Loosen and remove jam nut (item 21). Remove tilt
steering lever from steering tower. Locate and retrieve
friction washers (items 23 and 25) and flat washer (item
26).
9. Loosen and remove four (4) socket head screws
(item 20) and spring washers (item 19) that secure
steering control valve to steering column.
10.Loosen and remove flange screws (items 4 and 17)
and flange nuts (item 14) that attach steering column to
frame.
2. Slide steering column onto steering control valve.
Position spacers (items 16 and 18) to steering column.
3. Attach steering column to frame with flange screws
(items 4 and 17) and flange nuts (item 14).
4. Secure steering column to steering control valve with
four (4) socket head screws (item 20) and spring washers (item 19).
5. Apply antiseize lubricant onto threads and rod of tilt
steering lever (item 11). Position friction washer (item
23) between steering tower and pivot plate (item 24).
Install tilt lever through steering tower boss, friction
washer and pivot plate. Place friction washer (item 25)
and flat washer (item 26) onto lever and thread jam nut
(item 21) onto lever.
6. Torque jam nut from 20 to 23 ft−lb (27.1 to 31.2 N−m)
so lever handle is secured in the up position (90o + 10o
from horizontal).
7. Position tilt bracket (item 27) onto jam nut and secure
to steering tower with flange head screw (item 17) and
flange nut (item 14).
8. Position tower panel to machine and secure with six
(6) phillips head screws.
9. Install knob on end of parking brake rod.
10.Slide foam collar onto steering column.
11. Slide steering column from steering control valve
and remove from machine. Locate and retrieve two (2)
spacers (items 16 and 18).
12.Install steering wheel cover onto steering wheel.
Chassis
12.If necessary, remove two (2) cap screws (item 15)
and flange nuts (item 22) that secure pivot plate (item
27) to steering column.
11. Slide steering wheel onto steering column and secure with hex nut. Torque hex nut from 20 to 26 ft−lb
(27.1 to 35.3 N−m).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 7 Rev. A
Chassis
Rear Frame and Axle Assembly
7
5
6
8
2
4
3
12
9
11
5
10
6
1
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rear frame & axle assembly (2WD)
Cap screw (2 used)
Flat washer (2 used if equipped)
Rear weight (if equipped)
Chassis
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lock nut (2 used)
Flange head screw (4 used)
Cap screw (2 used)
Rear frame & axle assembly (4WD)
Page 7 − 8
9.
10.
11.
12.
Bidirectional clutch
Lock washer (6 used)
Socket head screw (6 used)
Drive shaft yoke
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 3)
Installation (Fig. 3)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Carefully position rear frame and axle assembly to
machine frame.
2. Block front tires to prevent the machine from moving.
NOTE: To ease reassembly, tag hydraulic hoses to
show their correct position on the steering cylinder.
3. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the steering
cylinder. Put caps or plugs on all fittings and hoses to
prevent contamination.
4. On 4 wheel drive machines, remove six (6) socket
head screws and lock washers that secure drive shaft to
bidirectional clutch. Position drive shaft away from bidirectional clutch.
5. If machine has rear weight(s) attached to frame, remove weight(s).
6. Remove two (2) cap screws and lock nuts that secure rear of axle frame to machine frame.
7. Jack up the rear of the machine so that the tires are
just off the ground. Support rear of machine frame with
jack stands or appropriate blocking.
NOTE: The flange head screws (item 6) used to secure
the rear frame and axle assembly to the machine frame
have a patch lock to prevent the screws from loosening.
When installing rear frame and axle to machine, either
replace flange head screws (item 6) or clean screw
threads and apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to
threads of screws.
2. Align mounting holes in rear frame and axle assembly. Install and tighten four (4) flange head screws (item
6) to secure rear frame and axle assembly. While tightening screws, make sure that mounting holes on the
rear of the frame align with the axle frame holes.
3. Secure rear of axle frame to machine frame with two
(2) cap screws and lock nuts.
4. If equipped with rear weight(s), attach weight(s) to
rear of machine.
5. On 4 wheel drive machines, position drive shaft to bidirectional clutch. Secure drive shaft to bidirectional
clutch with six (6) socket head screws and lock washers.
8. Remove four (4) flange head screws (item 6) that secure rear frame and axle assembly to machine frame.
6. Remove all caps and plugs from hydraulic fittings
and hoses. Correctly connect hydraulic hoses to the
steering cylinder.
9. Carefully move rear frame and axle assembly from
machine.
7. Lower machine to the ground.
8. Check hydraulic fluid level in reservoir (front axle)
and adjust as required (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
9. Start engine and check for component interference
as steering wheel is turned from lock to lock.
Chassis
10.Check rear wheel toe−in and adjust if necessary (see
Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 9
Chassis
Rear Axle (2 Wheel Drive)
130 to 150 ft−lb
(176 to 203 N−m)
30
29
28
21
22
27
26
20
23
19
25
24
18
16
15
75 to 80 ft−lb
(102 to 108 N−m)
17
14
4
13
12
RIGHT
5
11
3
6
10
FRONT
2
1
11
7
9
8
130 to 150 ft−lb
(176 to 203 N−m)
Figure 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Rear axle
Rear wheel assembly
Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
Washer
Steering pivot
Lock nut
Thrust washer
Retaining ring
Ball joint (LH thread)
Jam nut (LH thread)
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Jam nut
Tie rod
Jam nut (RH thread)
Ball joint (RH thread)
Spindle (RH shown)
Flat washer
Thrust washer (.766” ID)
Cap screw
Spacer
Steering cylinder
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Cap screw
Lock nut
Lock nut
Thrust washer (1.030” ID)
Shim washer (1.060” ID)
Lock nut
Rear frame
Flat washer
Cap screw
Pivot pin
NOTE: For repair information regarding the rear axle
on 4 wheel drive machines, refer to Chapter 8 − Drive
Axles.
Chassis
Page 7 − 10
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 4)
Installation (Fig. 4)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Thoroughly clean the rear axle pivot pin. Inspect the
pin for wear or damage and replace if necessary.
2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the steering
cylinder. Put caps or plugs on all fittings and hoses to
prevent contamination.
2. Position the axle to the rear frame. Install small ID
thrust washer (item 17) in front of axle tube and large ID
thrust washer (item 24) directly behind axle tube. Place
shim washer(s) (item 25) as required between large ID
thrust washer and rear frame to allow .030” to .090” (.8
to 2.3 mm) axle tube end play. Slide pivot pin through
rear frame, washers and axle.
3. Remove the lock nut (item 23) that secures the end
of the axle pivot pin (item 29) to the rear frame.
3. Secure pivot pin to rear frame with cap screw (item
28), flat washer (item 27) and lock nut (item 26).
4. Jack up the machine (just ahead of the rear wheels)
until pressure is taken off the axle pivot pin. Support the
machine with jack stands to prevent it from falling.
4. Tighten lock nut (item 23) until shoulder of pivot pin
bottoms against the rear frame. Make sure that axle can
still pivot freely after lock nut is tightened.
5. Remove lock nut (item 26), cap screw (item 28) and
flat washer (item 27) that secure pivot pin to rear frame.
5. Remove the jackstands and lower the machine to the
ground.
NOTE: Several washers (items 17, 24 and 25) are
installed between the axle pivot tube and rear frame to
adjust clearance between axle pivot tube and rear
frame. Before removing axle pivot pin, note location of
washers.
6. Install the hydraulic hoses to the steering cylinder.
NOTE: To ease reassembly, tag hydraulic hoses to
show their correct position on the steering cylinder.
6. Pull the axle pivot pin out. This will release the rear
axle and washer(s) from the frame. Carefully pull the entire axle and wheel assembly out from under the machine.
7. Check oil level in hydraulic reservoir (front axle) (see
Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
8. Lubricate the rear axle pivot bushings through the
grease fitting on the axle pivot tube (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
9. Operate machine and check steering cylinder hydraulic connections for leaks.
Chassis
7. Locate and retrieve thrust washers (items 17 and 24)
and shim washer(s) (item 25).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 11
Chassis
Rear Axle Service (2 Wheel Drive)
2
3
1
25
4
FRONT
5
RIGHT
6
7
8
24
25
13
13
9
21
12
8
13
23
5
16
22
15
10
21
14
20
13
15
19
12
17
14
18
11
18
17
16
Figure 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Rear axle
Flange head screw
Spindle cap
Retaining ring
Thrust washer (.060” thick)
Flat washer (.018” thick)
Flat washer (.032” thick)
Spindle bushing
Grease fitting (3 used)
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Thrust washer
RH spindle
Flat washer
Jam nut
Jam nut (LH thread)
Ball joint (LH thread)
Ball joint
Jam nut
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Tie rod
Retaining ring
Thrust washer
Steering pivot bushing
Steering pivot plate
Grease fitting
LH spindle
Axle pivot bushing
NOTE: For repair information regarding the rear axle
on 4 wheel drive machines, refer to Chapter 8 − Drive
Axles.
Chassis
Page 7 − 12
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Axle Pivot Bushings (Fig. 5)
The rear axle must be held in place snugly by the axle
pivot pin. Excessive movement of the axle, which is
characterized by erratic steering, can indicate worn axle
pivot bushings. To correct the problem, replace the axle
pivot bushings (item 25).
1. Remove rear axle from machine (see Rear Axle Removal in this section).
2. Use a drift punch and hammer to drive both axle pivot
bushings out of the axle pivot tube. Clean the inside of
the tube to remove dirt and foreign material.
3. Apply grease to the inside and outside of the new
bushings. Use an arbor press to install the bushings into
the front and back of the axle pivot tube. Bushings must
be flush with the axle tube.
4. Install rear axle to machine (see Rear Axle Installation in this section).
6. Apply grease to the inside and outside of the new
bushings. Use an arbor press to install the bushings into
the top and bottom of the steering pivot. Bushings must
be flush with the pivot plate.
7. Slide the steering pivot onto the axle mounting pin.
Secure the pivot in place with the thrust washer and retaining ring.
8. Connect each tie rod end to the pivot with two (2) jam
nuts. For each tie rod, tighten the first jam nut and then
tighten the second jam nut against the first to secure tie
rod end.
9. Install the thrust washer, cap screw and lock nut to
secure the steering cylinder rod end to the steering pivot
plate. Torque the nut from 130 to 150 ft-lb (176 to
203 N−m).
10.Lubricate the bushings through the grease fitting on
the steering pivot plate.
Steering Pivot Bushings (Fig. 5)
130 to 150 ft−lb
(176 to 203 N−m)
The steering pivot must fit snugly onto the mounting pin.
Excessive movement of the steering pivot may indicate
worn steering pivot bushings (item 21) or tie rod ball
joints (items 14 and 15).
2
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove the lock nut, cap screw and thrust washer
that secure the steering cylinder rod end to the steering
pivot plate (Fig. 6).
3
4
Figure 6
1. Steering pivot plate
2. Cap screw
3. Thrust washer
4. Lock nut
Chassis
4. Remove the retaining ring and thrust washer that secure steering pivot (item 22) to rear axle. Slide the steering pivot off of the mounting pin on the bottom of the axle.
130 to 150 ft−lb
(176 to 203 N−m)
1
3. Remove four (4) jam nuts to allow both tie rod ends
to be disconnected from the pivot plate. Inspect all tie
rod end ball joints for wear or damage and replace as
necessary.
5. Use a drift punch and hammer to drive both steering
pivot bushings out of the steering pivot. Clean the inside
of the steering pivot to remove dirt and foreign material.
Also clean the mounting pin on the bottom of the rear
axle.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 13
Chassis
Rear Axle Spindle Bushings (Fig. 5)
The rear wheel spindles must fit snugly in the rear axle.
Excessive movement of the spindle in the axle indicates
that the spindle bushings (item 8) are probably worn and
must be replaced.
1. Remove rear axle from machine (see Rear Axle Removal in this section).
2. Remove two (2) jam nuts and flat washer that secure
the tie rod end to the spindle arm. Disconnect the tie rod
end from the spindle arm.
3. Remove the flange screw, spindle cap, retaining ring
and washers that secure the wheel spindle into the axle
tube. Slide the spindle, washers and wheel assembly
out of the axle tube to expose the spindle bushings.
4. Use a punch and hammer to drive both bushings out
of the axle tube. Take care not to damage the inside of
the axle tube. Clean the inside of the axle tube to remove
any dirt or foreign material.
7. Install two thrust washers (items 10 and 5) onto the
spindle shaft and slide the shaft up through the axle
tube. Hold the wheel and spindle shaft assembly in
place and install the flat washer(s) (items 7 and 6), thrust
washer (item 5) and retaining ring (item 4) onto the end
of the spindle shaft.
8. End play of spindle should be .030” to .090” (.8 to 2.3
mm) after assembly. If necessary, adjust end play by
adding or removing flat washers (items 6 and 7).
9. Install the spindle cap and cap screw.
10.Connect the tie rod end to the spindle bracket with
flat washer and two (2) jam nuts. Tighten the first jam nut
and then tighten the second jam nut against the first to
secure tie rod end to spindle.
11. Install rear axle to machine (see Rear Axle Installation in this section).
12.Lubricate the steering spindles through the grease
fittings on the rear axle (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
5. Apply grease to the inside and outside of the new
bushings. Use an arbor press to install the bushings into
the top and bottom of the axle tube. The bushings must
be flush with the axle tube.
13.Check rear wheel toe−in (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
6. Thoroughly clean the spindle shaft. Inspect the
spindle for wear and replace if worn or damaged.
14.After all adjustments have been made, make sure
that no contact is made between any steering components as the wheels are moved from lock to lock. Readjust if necessary.
Chassis
Page 7 − 14
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Rear Wheel Bearings (2 Wheel Drive)
NOTE: For repair information regarding the rear axle
on 4 wheel drive machines, refer to Chapter 8 − Drive
Axles.
4. Slide the wheel hub assembly onto the spindle shaft
and secure it in place with the tab washer and jam nut.
DO NOT tighten the nut or install the cotter pin.
Disassembly (Fig. 7)
5. Rotate the wheel hub by hand and tighten the jam nut
from 75 to 100 in-lb (8.5 to 11.3 N−m) to set the bearings.
Then, loosen the nut until the hub has endplay.
1. Jack up the rear of the machine until the tire is off the
floor. Support the machine with jack stands or blocks to
prevent it from falling.
2. Remove the rear wheel (see Wheels in this section).
3. Remove the dust cap from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the cotter pin, retainer, jam nut and tab
washer. Slide the wheel hub from the spindle shaft.
5. Pull the seal out of the wheel hub. Discard seal.
6. Remove the bearing cones from both sides of the
wheel hub. Clean the bearings in solvent. Make sure the
bearings are in good operating condition. Clean the inside of the wheel hub. Check the bearing cups for wear,
pitting or other noticeable damage. Replace worn or
damaged parts.
6. Rotate the wheel hub by hand and tighten the jam nut
from 15 to 20 in-lb (1.7 to 2.3 N−m). After final tightening,
make sure that the wheel hub does not have any free
play.
7. Install retainer with slot aligned to cotter pin hole in
spindle. Install cotter pin.
8. Install dust cap.
9. Install rear wheel (see Wheels in this section).
10.Remove jack stands or blocks and lower machine to
floor.
6
8
Assembly (Fig. 7)
7
1. If bearing cups were removed from the wheel hub,
press them into the hub until they seat against the shoulder of the hub.
6
5
9
IMPORTANT: The seal must be pressed in so it is
flush with the end of the wheel hub. The lip of the
seal must be toward the bearing.
2. Pack both bearings with grease. Install one bearing
into the cup on inboard side of the wheel hub. Lubricate
the inside of the new seal and press it into the wheel hub.
2
1
3
Figure 7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dust cap
Cotter pin
Retainer
Jam nut
Tab washer
6.
7.
8.
9.
Bearing cone
Bearing cup (2 used)
Wheel hub
Seal
Chassis
3. Pack inside of wheel hub with some grease (not full).
Position remaining bearing into the outer bearing cup.
4
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 15
Chassis
Operator Seat
1
2
15
14
13
3
12
11
10
4
9
5
8
6
7
4
Figure 8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Seat
Washer head screw (2 used)
Seat adjuster with latch
Flange nut (4 used)
Cap (4 used)
Chassis
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Flange nut (2 used)
Seat Base
Flange head screw (2 used)
Screw (4 used)
Seat suspension
Page 7 − 16
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Socket head screw (4 used)
Flat washer (4 used)
Spacer (2 used) (pneumatic seat)
Seat switch
Seat adjuster
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 8)
Installation (Fig. 8)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Install seat components using Figure 8 as a guide.
2. Disconnect electrical connector from the seat switch.
On pneumatic seat suspension systems, disconnect
electrical connector from the suspension.
3. Secure seat base to machine with two (2) flange
head screws (item 8) and two (2) flange nuts (item 6).
3. Remove two (2) flange head screws (item 8) and two
(2) flange nuts (item 6) that secure seat base to machine.
2. Position seat and seat base to machine.
4. Connect electrical connector to the seat switch. On
pneumatic seat suspension systems, connect electrical
connector to the suspension.
4. Remove seat and seat base from machine.
Chassis
5. Remove seat components as necessary using Figure 8 as a guide.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 17
Chassis
Mechanical Seat Suspension
1
18
40
37
34
11
41
19
28
29
26
31
10
47
38
30
6
8
2
23
27
4
24
22 7
16
21
33
43
14 20
35 36
12
13
25
45
39
5
17
9
32
44
3
15
42
46
Figure 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Upper housing
Weight adjust knob
Lower housing
Outer scissor arm
Inner scissor arm
Weight adjust
Drive arm
Extension spring (2 used)
Roller guide
Weight adjust knob
Cap
Suspension boot
Pivot block (2 used)
Damper
Lower shock bolt
Upper shock bushing (2 used)
Chassis
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Lower shock bushing (2 used)
Stop bumper
Height adjust rod
Cross pivot bolt (2 used)
Stop bumper (2 used)
Bearing tube (2 used)
Spring shaft
Pivot pin
Roller pin
Spring bushing (2 used)
Shaft block (2 used)
Weight adjust spacer
Weight adjust tape
Weight adjust nut
Weight tape guide
Roller (4 used)
Page 7 − 18
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
Extension spring
Bumper
Spacer washer (2 used)
Cross pivot bearing (2 used)
Flat washer
Flat washer
Lock nut (2 used)
Roll pin (2 used)
Roll pin
Clip (20 used)
Retainer (3 used)
Thread forming screw (8 used)
Hex nut (2 used)
Lock nut
Lock nut
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 9)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
5
4
6
2. Remove seat and seat suspension from machine
(see Operator Seat in this section).
1
3. Remove mechanical seat suspension components
as needed using Figures 9 and 10 as guides.
Installation (Fig. 9)
2
1. Install mechanical seat suspension components using Figure 9 and 10 as guides.
3
2. Install seat and seat suspension to machine (see
Operator Seat in this section). Make sure to connect
electrical connector to the seat switch.
Figure 10
4. RH slide bracket
5. Lock nut (4 used)
6. LH slide bracket
Chassis
1. Suspension assembly
2. Mounting bracket
3. Cap screw (4 used)
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 19
Chassis
Pneumatic Seat Suspension
3
28
9
6
30
22
36
26
168 to 264 in−lb
(19.0 to 29.8 N−m)
12
11
8
1
17
18 24
20
5
21
15
25
38
19
14
40 to 50 in−lb
(4.5 to 5.7 N−m)
35
10
33
31
23
37
13
2
16
34
108 in−lb
(12.2 N−m)
4
7
27
29
84 to 132 in−lb
(9.5 to 14.9 N−m)
32
40 to 50 in−lb
(4.5 to 5.7 N−m)
Figure 11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Scissor assembly
Lower housing
Upper housing
Air spring
Roller (4 used)
Bumper (2 used)
Shock mount bolt
Weight tape adjuster
Up stop bracket (2 used)
Suspension boot
Weight tape guide
Weight tape roller
Shock bushing (4 used)
Chassis
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Scissor pivot block (2 used)
Bumper spacer (2 used)
Damper
Compression clamp
Compressor
Elbow stud
Down stop bumper (2 used)
Shaft block (2 used)
Air control valve
Wire harness
Tubing (2 used)
Tee fitting
Connector
Page 7 − 20
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
Lock nut
Carriage bolt (2 used)
Clip (25 used)
Tubing
Retaining ring
Screw
Flange head screw (2 used)
Thread forming screw (8 used)
Hex nut (2 used)
Lock nut (2 used)
Flat washer (2 used)
Cap screw
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 11)
1
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove seat and seat suspension from machine
(see Operator Seat Removal in this section).
3. Remove pneumatic seat suspension components as
necessary using Figures 11 and 12 as guides.
Installation (Fig. 11)
1. Install pneumatic seat suspension components using Figures 11 and 12 as guides. Refer to Figure 11 for
fastener torque values for assembly purposes.
2
2. Install seat and seat suspension to machine (see
Operator Seat Installation in this section). Make sure to
connect electrical connector to the seat switch.
3
Figure 12
3. Cap screw (4 used)
Chassis
1. Suspension assembly
2. Bracket (2 used)
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 21
Chassis
Lift Arms
22
2
1
5
3
21
4
6
20
19
18
7
17
15
14
13
12
8
9
16
11
10
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Carrier bracket
Cap screw
Flat washer
Hair pin
Height of cut collar
Clevis pin
Lift arm (LH shown)
Thrust washer
Chassis
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Hair pin
Clevis pin
Cap screw
Lock nut
Rod end
Jam nut
Height of cut tube
Page 7 − 22
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Roll pin
Roll pin
Pivot pin
Cotter pin
Cylinder pin
Cotter pin
Lift cylinder
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 13)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
3
2
2. Remove cutting deck (or implement) from lift arm
(see Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
3
1
4
3. Disconnect brake return spring from lift arm.
5
4. Remove front lift arm components from machine using Figure 13 as a guide.
6
10
5. If necessary, disassemble lift arm using Figure 14 as
a guide.
7
9
Installation (Fig. 13)
1. If lift arm was disassembled, install lift arm components using Figure 14 as a guide.
8
2. Install front lift arm components to machine using
Figure 13 as a guide.
A. If roll pins (items 13 and 14) were removed from
pivot pin (item 15), install roll pins so that one end is
flush with pivot pin. Also, inner roll pin split should be
opposite outer roll pin split (Fig. 15).
Figure 14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Lift arm (LH shown)
Rivet (3 used)
Flange bushing
Grease fitting
Plastic pad
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Rubber pad
Washer (3 used)
Grease fitting
Spherical bearing
Retaining ring
3. Connect brake return spring to lift arm.
4. Mount cutting deck(or implement) to lift arm (see
Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
Inner roll
pin split
Outer roll
pin split
5. See Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual for lift arm adjustment procedures.
Chassis
Roll pin ends flush
with pivot pin surface
Figure 15
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 7 − 23
Chassis
This page is intentionally blank.
Chassis
Page 7 − 24
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chapter 8
Drive Axles
Table of Contents
Rear Axle (4 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bevel Gear Case and Axle Case
(4 Wheel Drive Axle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differential Shafts (4 Wheel Drive Axle) . . . . . . .
Axle Shafts (4 Wheel Drive Axle) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Shaft/Pinion Gear (4 Wheel Drive Axle) . .
Differential Gear Assembly (4 Wheel Drive Axle)
Pinion Gear to Ring Gear Engagement
(4 Wheel Drive Axle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bidirectional Clutch (4 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . .
Bidirectional Clutch Service (4 Wheel Drive) . . .
34
36
40
41
42
44
47
50
52
Drive
Axles
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 Wheel Drive Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Brake Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Front Axle Shafts and Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front Axle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ring to Pinion Gear Engagement (Front Axle) . 29
Rear Axle Drive Shaft (4 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . 32
Rear Axle Drive Shaft Cross and
Bearing Service (4 Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 1
Drive Axles
Specifications
Item
Description
Front Axle (Hydraulic Reservoir) Oil
See Traction Unit Operator’s Manual
Front Axle (Hydraulic Reservoir) Capacity
6 Qts. U.S. (5.7 L)
(see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for checking procedure)
4WD Rear Axle Lubricant
GL−5 API, SAE 80W−90 gear lube
4WD Rear Axle Lubricant Capacity
3.1 quarts (2.9 liters)
(see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for checking procedure)
4WD Bidirectional Clutch Lubricant
Mobil Fluid 424
4WD Bidirectional Clutch Capacity
1.2 fl.ounces (35 ml)
(see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for checking procedure)
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 2
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
General Information
Front Axle
The Groundsmaster 3280−D and 3320 use a Dana
Axle, model GT-20. The differential and axle form the final drive of the power train (Fig. 1).
The differential has a heavy duty case with automotive
type, cut gears that rotate on tapered roller bearings.
Single-row, pre-set, tapered roller bearings are used on
the outside ends of the axle shafts.
The entire drive line of the axle assembly is made of
alloy steel. The axle has a die-cast aluminum housing
that also serves as the hydraulic oil reservoir.
Power is transmitted from the hydrostatic transmission
output gear to the axle pinion spur gear. The pinion spur
gear transmits power directly to the differential drive
gears, to turn the axles and the front wheels.
The differential axle has a one-piece axle shaft with the
flange being part of the axle stem.
Figure 1
4 Wheel Drive Rear Axle
The 4WD rear axle used on the Groundsmaster 3280−D
is a steerable, mechanical drive axle. A drive shaft connected to the front axle output shaft provides power to
the 4WD rear axle. The drive shaft incorporates a bidirectional clutch that transfers power from the drive
shaft to the 4WD rear axle input shaft (Fig. 2).
Any time the front wheels change speed (e.g. initially depressing the traction pedal, climbing an incline, tires
slipping), the rear axle drive shaft speed also changes.
As soon as the drive shaft and the rear axle input shaft
turn at slightly different speeds, the bidirectional clutch
will engage and power is transferred to the rear axle
(Fig. 3). The result is automatic four wheel drive. The
clutch engages in either forward or reverse direction.
FORWARD CLUTCH
REVERSE CLUTCH
NEUTRAL
ENGAGEMENT
(FREEWHEELING)
ENGAGEMENT
Drive
Axles
NOTE: The bidirectional clutch may not operate properly if different size tires are used or if correct tire pressure is not maintained.
Figure 2
Figure 3
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 3
Drive Axles
Special Tools
Order special tools from your Toro Distributor.
Differential Gear Holder (TOR4027)
Remove gear cover from right hand side of differential
and bolt this tool in place to lock spur gear in position
when removing nut that secures pinion coupler.
Figure 4
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 4 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Drive
Axles
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 5
Drive Axles
Service and Repairs
Brake Service
7
8
5
4
6
10
9
3
2
11
1
18
13
12
14
15
17
16
3
Figure 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lock nut
Brake drum
Brake shoe set
Pivot nut
Star wheel adjuster
Star wheel socket
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Return spring
Dust shield
Brake cable
Clevis pin
Cotter pin
Brake return spring
Disassembly
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Brake cable link
Brake lever
Brake spider
Return spring
Brake lever retainer
Adjuster spring
3. Remove wheel lug nuts and slide wheel assembly
from front axle.
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine and remove key from the
ignition switch.
CAUTION
When removing wheels, use correct blocks,
hoists and jacks. Make sure machine is parked
on a solid, level surface such as a concrete
floor. Prior to raising machine, remove any attachments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock or
block wheels. Use jack stands or solid wood
blocks to support the raised machine. If the machine is not properly supported by blocks or
jack stands, the machine may move or fall,
which may result in personal injury.
4. Remove brake return spring (item 12) from brake
cable link (item 13). Disconnect brake cable from brake
lever by removing cotter pin (item 11) and clevis pin
(item 10).
NOTE: If the brake drum is severely worn, it may be
necessary to loosen the brake shoes before removing
the brake drum. Loosen the brake shoes by turning the
star wheel adjuster inside the brake drum assembly.
5. Remove the lock nut (item 1) that retains the brake
drum. Pull the brake drum from the machine.
6. Inspect braking surface of brake drum. If excessive
wear or scoring exist, replace brake drum.
2. Chock rear wheels and jack up front of machine (see
Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 − Safety). Support machine with jack stands or solid wood blocks.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 6
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
2. Position brake return springs (Items 7 and 11) to
brake shoes.
CAUTION
Be careful when removing adjuster and brake return springs. The springs are under tension and
could possibly slip during removal.
3. Position brake lever to brake shoes. Secure brake lever to shoes with retainers (item 12).
4. Spread the upper ends of the brake shoes and install
star wheel assembly (items 4, 5 and 6).
7. Remove adjuster spring (item 13).
5. Install adjuster spring (item 13).
8. Spread the upper ends of the brake shoes and remove star wheel assembly (items 4, 5 and 6).
6. Install brake drum on wheel studs. Install lock nut
(item 1).
9. Remove brake lever retainers (cotter pins) (item 12).
10.Pull brake lever from brake shoes.
7. Install wheel assembly on studs and secure with five
(5) lug nuts. Torque lug nuts in a crossing pattern from
75 to 80 ft-lb (102 to 108 N−m).
11. Remove brake shoe return springs (Items 7 and 11)
by prying the end of the spring up and out of the brake
shoe. Use a brake spring pliers or flat blade screwdriver.
8. Secure brake cable to brake lever with clevis pin
(item 10) and cotter pin (item 11). Attach brake return
spring (item 12) to brake cable link (item 13).
12.Remove brake shoes by sliding them both down
from brake spider.
9. Remove jack stands or blocking and lower machine
to the floor.
Assembly
10.Adjust brakes (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
1. Slide brake shoes up onto brake spider.
CAUTION
Drive
Axles
Be careful when installing brake return and adjuster springs. The springs are under tension
and could possibly slip during installation.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 7
Drive Axles
Front Axle Shafts and Bearings
3
13
12
11
10
7
9
8
14
6
5
15
4
17
16
3
2
1
18
27
22
21
20
23
24
19
16 to 20 ft−lb
(22 to 27 N−m)
26
28
25
Figure 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Lock nut
Brake drum
Axle shaft
Wheel stud (5 used per wheel)
Hardened washer (4 used per wheel)
Pivot nut
Star wheel adjuster
Star wheel socket
Brake spider
Dust shield
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Bearing
Bearing retainer
Inner axle oil seal
Socket head screw (4 used per wheel)
Front axle housing
Brake cable
Clevis pin
Cotter pin
Brake return spring
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the front axle assembly from machine when servicing front axle shafts.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Brake cable link
Brake lever
Brake return spring
Brake return spring
Adjuster spring
Brake shoe
Brake lever retainer
Outer seal plate
Lock nut (4 used per wheel)
CAUTION
Disassembly (Fig. 6)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine and remove key from the
ignition switch.
2. Remove brake return spring (item 19) from brake
cable link (item 20). Disconnect brake cable from brake
lever by removing cotter pin (item 18) and clevis pin
(item 17).
When removing wheels, use correct blocks,
hoists and jacks. Make sure machine is parked
on a solid, level surface such as a concrete
floor. Prior to raising machine, remove any attachments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock or
block wheels. Use jack stands or solid wood
blocks to support the raised machine. If the machine is not properly supported by blocks or
jack stands, the machine may move or fall,
which may result in personal injury.
3. Chock rear wheels and jack up front of machine (see
Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 − Safety). Support machine with jack stands or solid wood blocks.
4. Remove wheel lug nuts and slide wheel assembly
from front axle.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 8
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
5. Remove the lock nut (item 1) that retains the brake
drum. Slide the brake drum from machine (Fig. 7).
NOTE: If the brake drum is severely worn, it may be
necessary to loosen the brake shoes before removing
the brake drum. Loosen the brake shoes by turning the
star wheel adjuster (item 7) inside the brake drum assembly.
Figure 7
6. Remove the four (4) lock nuts, hardened washers
and socket head screws that secure brake assembly
and outer seal plate to axle housing (Fig. 8). Use the
hole in the axle shaft flange to gain access to the lock
nuts.
IMPORTANT: Hold the socket head screws with a
wrench to prevent the screw head from rotating and
damaging the axle tube.
Figure 8
7. Pull the axle shaft and brake assembly out of the axle
housing (Fig 9).
NOTE: Remove the bearing race from the axle housing
with a bearing puller if necessary.
Drive
Axles
Figure 9
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 9
Drive Axles
8. Remove and discard the inner axle shaft seal
(Fig. 10).
Figure 10
9. Center punch and drill a 1/4 inch (6 mm) hole
(approximate) into the outside of the bearing retainer to
a depth of about 3/4 the thickness of the retainer (Fig.
11).
IMPORTANT: Drilling completely through the retainer ring will damage the axle shaft.
Figure 11
10.Place a chisel in position across the drilled hole and
strike sharply to break the retainer (Fig. 12). Remove
and discard the retainer.
WARNING
Wear protective safety goggles when breaking
the retaining ring. Personal injury could result
from flying metal particles. Keep bystanders
away during this procedure.
Figure 12
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 10
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
11. Remove the bearing from axle shaft.
12.Remove and discard the outer seal plate.
13.Inspect all components for wear and damage
(Fig. 13). Replace the axle shaft if the seal has grooved
the axle surface more that 1/64 inch (0.40 mm).
Figure 13
Assembly (Fig. 6)
1. Coat a new outer seal plate with a thin film of oil and
place the outer seal plate, brake assembly and dust
shield in position on the axle shaft.
2. Pack the bearing with grease and press it onto the
axle shaft (Fig. 14).
IMPORTANT: Drive the bearing onto the axle shaft
by pressing on the inner race of the bearing only.
Figure 14
3. Slide a new bearing retainer on the axle shaft. Support the shaft and retainer in a suitable press and press
the bearing retainer firmly against the bearing (Fig. 15).
IMPORTANT: Do not heat the bearing retainer to
install. Heat will destroy the close tolerance press
fit.
Drive
Axles
Figure 15
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 11
Drive Axles
4. Prepare a new inner shaft seal for assembly. Put a
light coat of No. 1 Permatex (or equivalent) on the outside diameter (surface that contacts the axle housing),
and a thin film of oil on the inside diameter (surface that
contacts the axle shaft). Install the new seal to a depth
of 1.218 in. (30.90 mm) into the axle housing (Fig. 16).
1.218” (30.90 mm)
Figure 16
5. Apply a 1/16” (1.60 mm) bead of Loctite Ultra Gray
Silicone (gasket eliminator) to the axle housing flange.
Align the dust shield and brake assembly with axle housing flange and push the axle shaft assembly all the way
into the axle housing. Be careful not to damage the oil
seal and bearing (Fig. 17).
NOTE: Liquid Gasket Kit (Toro P/N 92-8775) includes
Loctite Ultra Gray Silicone (gasket eliminator) and application instructions.
Figure 17
6. Install socket head screws, hardened washers and
lock nuts. Tighten the nuts in an alternating pattern so
the bearing is drawn into the axle housing evenly (Fig.
18). Torque the nuts from 16 to 20 ft-lb (22 to 27 N−m).
IMPORTANT: When tightening the lock nuts, hold
the socket head screws with a wrench to prevent the
screw head from damaging the axle tube.
7. Slide the brake drum onto wheel studs. Retain brake
drum with lock nut (item 1).
8. Install wheel assembly on studs and secure with five
(5) lug nuts. Torque lug nuts in a crossing pattern from
75 to 80 ft-lb (102 to 108 N−m).
9. Secure brake cable to brake lever with clevis pin
(item 17) and cotter pin (item 18). Attach brake return
spring (item 19) to brake cable link (item 20).
Figure 18
10.Remove jack stands or blocking and lower machine
to the floor.
11. Adjust brakes (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 12
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Drive
Axles
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 13
Drive Axles
Front Axle
26
27
25
24
23
1
4
3
8
10
7
2
9
3
5
75 to 80 ft−lb
(102 to 108 N−m)
6
RIGHT
22
FRONT
19
11
18
17
12
20
21
16
13
15
14
Figure 19
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Cap screw
Cap screw (3 used)
Lock washer (4 used)
Flat washer
Spacer
Mounting spacer (4 used)
Pinion Gear
Snap ring
Gasket
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Front axle assembly
Jam nut
Transmission anchor
Lock nut
Carrier bracket (2 used)
Lug nut (5 used per wheel)
Tire and wheel assembly
Cap screw (4 used)
Flat washer (4 used)
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Axle shim (as needed)
Hydraulic fitting
Hose clamp
Hydraulic hose
Transmission
Lock nut (4 used)
Cap screw
Socket head screw (4 used)
Lock washer (4 used)
3. To prevent contamination of the hydraulic system,
thoroughly clean transmission and front axle.
Removal (Fig. 19)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
4. Drain oil from front axle (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
2. Remove the cutting deck (or implement) (See Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
5. Loosen hose clamp (item 21) and pull hydraulic hose
(item 22) from fitting (item 20) on axle.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 14
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
6. Remove lift arms from machine (See Lift Arm Removal in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 7
− Chassis).
3. Connect the brake cables to the brake actuating levers on each brake (Fig. 20). Secure brake cables to axle
brackets with jam nuts.
7. Remove fuel tank (See Fuel Tank Removal in the
Service and Repairs section of Chapter 3 − Gasoline Engine or Chapter 4 − Diesel Engine).
IMPORTANT: When installing hydrostatic transmission, make sure that transmission drive shaft alignment is checked and adjusted if necessary.
8. Remove carrier brackets (item 14) from machine
frame.
4. Install hydrostatic transmission to machine (See Hydrostatic Transmission Installation in the Service and
Repairs section of Chapter 5 − Hydraulic System).
When removing wheels, use correct blocks,
hoists and jacks. Make sure machine is parked
on a solid, level surface such as a concrete
floor. Prior to raising machine, remove any attachments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock or
block wheels. Use jack stands or solid wood
blocks to support the raised machine. If the machine is not properly supported by blocks or
jack stands, the machine may move or fall,
which may result in personal injury.
9. Chock rear wheels and jack up front of machine (see
Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 − Safety). Support machine with jack stands or solid wood blocks. Release
parking brake.
10.Remove front wheel lug nuts and pull front wheels
from front axle.
11. Remove hydrostatic transmission from machine
(See Hydrostatic Transmission Removal in the Service
and Repairs section of Chapter 5 − Hydraulic System).
5. Install front wheels to axle and secure with lug nuts.
Torque lug nuts in a crossing pattern from 75 to 80 ft−lb
(102 to 108 N−m).
6. Install carrier brackets (item 14) to machine frame.
7. Install lift arms to machine (See Lift Arm Installation
in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 7 − Chassis).
8. Install fuel tank (See Fuel Tank Installation in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 3 − Gasoline Engine
or Chapter 4 − Diesel Engine).
9. Install hydraulic hose (item 22) to fitting (item 20) on
axle and secure with hose clamp (item 21).
10.Lower machine to ground.
11. Fill hydraulic reservoir (front axle) with oil (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
12.Install the cutting deck (or implement) (See Cutting
Unit Operator’s Manual).
12.Remove the cotter pin and clevis pin to disconnect
the brake cable from brake actuating lever on each
brake (Fig. 20). Loosen jam nut to remove brake cable
from each end of axle bracket.
3
13.Put a jack or blocking under front axle to prevent it
from falling. Remove cap screws, flat washers and lock
nuts that secure axle mounting pads to frame. Retrieve
and note location of axle shims (item 19).
5
4
6
14.Carefully lower front axle and remove from machine.
Installation (Fig. 19)
1. Position front axle to machine frame and support
axle in place.
1
2
Figure 20
1. Brake cable
2. Clevis pin
3. Cotter pin
4. Brake return spring
5. Brake cable link
6. Brake actuating lever
Drive
Axles
CAUTION
2. Place axle shims in location noted during disassembly. Install cap screws, flat washers and lock nuts that
secure axle mounting pads to frame. Leave fasteners
loose to allow alignment of transmission.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 15
Drive Axles
Front Axle Service
70 to 90 ft−lb
(95 to 122 N−m)
25 to 40 in−lb
(3.0 to 4.5 N−m)
RIGHT
14
FRONT
16
15
17
18
13
30 to 45 ft−lb
(41 to 61 N−m)
18 to 23 ft−lb
(24 to 31 N−m)
20 19
21
22
12
23
24
11
4
1
2
5
6
7
10
8
25
9
45 to 65 ft−lb
(61 to 88 N−m)
28
3
27
29
30
26
31
39
32
33
34
35
38
36
37
Figure 21
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Hex nut (8 used)
Lock washer (8 used)
Dowel pin (2 used)
Thrust washer (2 used)
Side bevel gear (2 used)
Pinion mate bevel gear (2 used)
Spherical thrust washer (2 used)
Drive pinion
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Cap screw (4 used)
Gear cover
Screw (8 used)
Drive Axles
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Spur gear
Shims
Cap screw (8 used)
Washer
Nut
Flange coupler
Seal
Shim pack
Outer bearing cone
Outer bearing cup
Bearing spacer
Rear axle (carrier) housing
Pinion mate shaft
Page 8 − 16
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
Differential bearing cup (2 used)
Differential bearing cone (2 used)
Ring gear
Lock pin
Cap screw (5 used)
Differential case
Shim pack
Front axle housing
Vent
Fitting
Pipe nipple
Oil fill tube
Dipstick
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Disassembly (Fig. 21)
1. Remove the right and left-hand axle assemblies.
(See Front Axle Shafts and Bearings Disassembly in
this section).
2. Remove the eight (8) housing cap screws, hex nuts
and lock washers that secure axle housings. Separate
the front and rear axle housings (Fig. 22). Clean all gasket material from the housing mating surfaces.
Figure 22
3. Remove the four bearing cap screws and remove the
caps. Place the caps in a safe place to avoid damaging
their machined surfaces (Fig. 23).
IMPORTANT: The bearing caps are marked for identification. The letters or numbers are in horizontal
and vertical positions. Record them for reference
during assembly. Always reinstall them in the same
position.
Figure 23
4. To remove the differential assembly, place two wooden devices (e.g. hammer handles) under the differential
case and pry firmly upward. Mark the bearing cups and
cones, they must be reinstalled in matched sets
(Fig. 24).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 17
Drive
Axles
Figure 24
Drive Axles
5. Remove the ring gear cap screws. Using a hard
wooden block and a hammer, drive the ring gear from
the differential case. Be prepared to protect the ring gear
when removing it from the differential case; this will
avoid damage of the ring gear teeth (Fig. 25).
NOTE: It is recommended that whenever the ring gear
cap screws are removed, they are to be replaced with
new screws.
Figure 25
6. Do not remove the bearings from the differential case
unless bearing failure is evident. It is recommended that
whenever bearings are removed (regardless of usage)
they must be replaced with new ones. Remove the case
side bearing with a puller as shown (Fig. 26).
If bearings are removed from differential case, locate
and retrieve shims from case. Note shim location to assist in assembly.
Figure 26
7. Put the case in a vise. Drive the lock pin out of the pinion mate shaft (Fig. 27). Use a small drift punch as
shown.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, always wear a face
shield or safety goggles when striking a drift
punch with a hammer.
Figure 27
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 18
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
8. While supporting the differential in a vise, drive the
pinion mate shaft from the differential with a long drift
punch (Fig. 28).
Figure 28
9. To remove the side gears and pinion mate gears, rotate the side gears. This will allow the pinion mate gears
to turn to the opening of the case (Fig. 29). Remove the
pinion mate gears and the spherical washers behind the
gears.
Inspect all differential components including the machined surfaces of the case. If gear damage is identified,
replace the entire gear set as damage to one gear will
most likely damage other gears as well. If necessary, replace the complete differential assembly.
Figure 29
10.Remove the eight side cover capscrews. Remove
the the side cover from the carrier assembly (Fig. 30).
Clean the gasket material from the mating surfaces before reassembly.
Drive
Axles
Figure 30
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 19
Drive Axles
11. Install differential gear holder to carrier to retain spur
gear (see Special Tools). Remove nut, washer, flange
coupler and seal from the pinion shaft (Fig. 31).
4
5
6
1
7
8
2
3
Figure 31
1.
2.
3.
4.
Nut
Washer
Flange coupler
Seal
5.
6.
7.
8.
Shim
Outer bearing cone
Outer bearing cup
Bearing spacer
12.Position the housing assembly on a suitable press.
Place a 1/8 inch (3 mm) piece of steel or a screwdriver
blade under the edge of the spur gear. This will prevent
the spur gear from cocking and possibly cracking the
housing (Fig. 32).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT allow the pinion shaft to drop
on the floor during removal as damage will result.
Carefully press drive pinion shaft from housing. When
the pinion is close to being pressed completely out of the
bearing, reach under the housing and catch the pinion
in your hand to prevent any damage to the pinion.
Figure 32
13.Removing the drive pinion releases the spur gear
(Fig. 33).
14.Remove oil seal from housing. Then remove the
bearing shim, outer pinion bearing cone and bearing
spacer from the housing (Fig. 31).
Figure 33
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 20
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
15.Clamp the inner pinion bearing with a universal bearing remover (Fig. 34). Position the unit in a press and
carefully push the drive pinion out of the bearing.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT allow the pinion to drop on
the floor during removal as damage will result.
Figure 34
16.To remove the outer pinion bearing cup, position the
housing in a press. Place a press plate of the proper size
against the cup. Press the cup out of the housing
(Fig. 35).
Figure 35
17.Position the front housing on a press bed with the
bearing saddles resting on the press bed. Protect the
bearing saddles with a piece of wood if the press bed is
rough.
Insert a press plate of the proper size and press the inner
bearing cup toward the inside of the housing. Retain the
shims located under the bearing cup (Fig. 36). If the
shims are damaged, replace with new shims of the
same thickness.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 21
Drive
Axles
Figure 36
Drive Axles
Assembly (Fig. 21)
1. Inspect the differential parts for damage before assembling.
A. If any bearings are damaged they must be replaced with new ones. Replace all removed bearings.
B. Check the ring, pinion and spur gear for abnormal
wear or damage; replace worn components.
C. Inspect the housings for cracks and external
damage that could affect the operation of the axle assembly.
D. Inspect the differential case for wear in the side
gear and pinion mate area. Replace the case if its
machined areas are scored or if the pinion mate shaft
fits loosely in the bore.
Figure 37
2. Press new pinion inner bearing cone onto the pinion
drive gear. Support the bearing on the inner cup of the
bearing ONLY WHEN INSTALLING (Fig. 37).
3. Put the front housing on a press. Using a press plate,
push new pinion outer bearing cup into the housing until
it bottoms in the housing (Fig. 38).
Figure 38
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 22
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
IMPORTANT: Correct engagement between ring
gear and pinion gear is critical to axle performance
and durability.
NOTE: A complete Upper Housing Assembly for Differential repairs is available. Using this assembly eliminates the need for shimming to establish the correct
contact pattern between the ring and pinion gears.
4. Determine the correct inner bearing shims for use
with ring and pinion gear sets:
A. When reinstalling the ORIGINAL ring and pinion
gears, the original bearing shims or new shims of the
same thickness should be used. In this case, proceed directly to step 5.
Figure 39
B. When installing NEW ring and pinion gears (supplied in matched sets only) make sure the numbers
etched on both the pinion and ring gear match
(Fig. 39).
Compare the +, - or 0 markings of the old and new
pinions. Adjust the thickness of a new shim pack to
compensate for the difference in these two numbers.
For example: If the old pinion reads +2 and the new
pinion reads -2, add 0.004 in. of bearing shims to the
original shim pack thickness.
NOTE: The following information is provided to help
you understand the adjustment required for proper engagement of NEW ring and pinion gears.
To ensure proper engagement, an additional number is
etched into the button end of each pinion gear. This
number indicates modifications that must be made to
the “pinion to ring gear distance” for each particular gear
set. This distance is controlled by adding or removing
shims behind the inner bearing cup.
A pinion gear etched 0 is considered standard, and has
a 1.210 in. pinion to ring gear distance.
A pinion gear etched +3 requires a pinion to ring gear
distance of 1.213 in. (+0.003 in. from standard). Removing 0.003 in. of bearing shims moves the pinion gear
away from the ring gear, increasing the pinion to ring
gear distance.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 23
Drive
Axles
A pinion gear etched -3 requires a pinion to ring gear distance of 1.207 in. (-0.003 in. from standard). Adding
0.003 in. of bearing shims moves the pinion gear closer
to the ring gear, decreasing the pinion to ring gear distance.
Drive Axles
5. Install the correct bearing shims and a new inner
bearing cup using a press plate of proper diameter.
Push the bearing into the housing until it bottoms out
against the shims (Fig. 40).
NOTE: Pinion bearing shims are available in 0.003 in.
(0.08 mm), 0.005 in. (0.13 mm), 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) and
0.030 in. (0.76 mm) thickness.
Figure 40
6. Insert the spur gear into the front housing with the
chamfered area of the center spline toward the pinion
gear. Tap the pinion gear with a soft mallet to engage the
splines in the spur gear (Fig. 41).
Figure 41
7. Support the drive pinion in a suitable press (Fig. 42).
Figure 42
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 24
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
8. Install the outer bearing spacer with the chamfer towards the pinion splines and position the new outer
bearing cone on the pinion shaft (Fig. 43).
Figure 43
9. With a hollow press sleeve of proper diameter, press
on the outer bearing cone race until the drive pinion
seats in the carrier and a slight drag is felt when the gear
is rotated by hand (Fig. 44). If more than 2 to 13 in-lb (.2
to 1.5 N−m) torque is required to rotate the pinion and
spur gear, tap the pinion shaft with a soft mallet until the
drag is reduced.
10.Apply Permatex No. 2 (or equivalent) to outer diameter of seal, external splines of pinion shaft and internal
splines of pinion coupler. Install differential gear holder
to carrier to retain spur gear (see Special Tools).
11. Install seal into housing. Install shim, flange coupler,
washer and nut onto end of the pinion shaft (Fig. 45).
Torque nut securing pinion coupler from 70 to 90 ft-lbs
(95 to 122 N−m).
Figure 44
12.Check pinion shaft end play.
4
5
PINION SHAFT END PLAY:
0.000 to 0.005 in. (0.00 to 0.13 mm)
6
If end play is incorrect, remove nut, washer and flange
coupler. Replace shim with appropriate thicker or thinner shim and reassemble. Make sure that pinion shaft
end play is correct before continuing with assembly procedure.
NOTE: Pinion shaft shims are available in 0.094 in.
(2.39 mm) to 0.120 in. (3.05 mm) thickness, and in
0.125 in. (3.18 mm) to 0.151 in. (3.84 mm) thickness in
0.002 (0.05 mm) increments.
8
2
3
70 to 90 ft−lb
(95 to 122 N−m)
Figure 45
1.
2.
3.
4.
Nut
Washer
Flange coupler
Seal
5.
6.
7.
8.
Shim
Outer bearing cone
Outer bearing cup
Bearing spacer
Drive
Axles
13.Remove differential gear holder from carrier.
1
7
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 25
Drive Axles
14.Make sure that all gasket material has been removed
from the mating surfaces of the spur gear cover and the
carrier before assembly.
Apply Permatex No. 2 or silicone sealant to mating surface of spur gear cover and carrier. Install the spur gear
cover (Fig. 46). Torque cap screws from 25 to 40 in-lb (3
to 4.5 N−m).
Figure 46
15.Place the differential case in a vise as shown
(Fig. 47). Apply grease to new side gear thrust washers
and hubs of the side gears. Apply grease to new pinion
mate spherical washers and pinion mate gears. Place
the side gears and thrust washers in the case. Install the
pinion gears while holding the side gears in place.
Rotate the side gears until the holes of the washers and
pinion gears line up with the holes of the case. If the
gears cannot be rotated by hand, install one of the axle
shafts into the side gear spline and use a pipe wrench
to turn the shafts.
Figure 47
16.Install the pinion shaft. Grease the shaft to aid assembly. Be sure the hole in the pinion shaft lines up with
the hole in the differential case (Fig. 48).
Figure 48
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 26
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
17.Assemble the lock pin. Drive the pin to the approximate center location of the pinion mate shaft. Peen the
metal of the case to lock the pin in place (Fig. 49).
Figure 49
18.Position the ring gear onto the differential case and
thread new cap screws into the ring gear. Tighten the
screws, alternating back and forth across the gear to allow the gear to be pulled evenly into place. Torque cap
screws from 45 to 65 ft-lb (61 to 88 N−m) to secure assembly (Fig. 50).
Figure 50
19.When installing new differential bearings, reuse the
original shims or use new shims of the same thickness.
Press the new differential bearings onto the differential
case. If a new differential case is being installed, start
with a 0.020 inch (0.50 mm) pack of shims under each
differential bearing (Fig. 51).
NOTE: Shims are available in 0.003 in. (0.08 mm),
0.005 in. (0.13 mm), 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) and 0.030 in.
(0.76 mm) thickness.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 27
Drive
Axles
Figure 51
Drive Axles
20.Assemble new differential bearing cups onto differential bearing cones. Seat differential assembly with
drive gear on proper side of carrier into carrier bearing
cradles.
NOTE: This application requires that the ring gear teeth
face toward the spur gear cover.
21.The bearing cradles are designed to apply a slight
preload to the bearings. It is important to push both of the
bearing assemblies simultaneously into their saddles.
Install the bearing caps into their original position as
marked during disassembly. Tighten the cap screws to
a torque from 30 to 45 ft-lb (41 to 61 N−m) (Fig. 52).
Figure 52
22.Using a dial indicator, check the ring gear backlash
in three equally spaced points. Ring gear backlash
should be .003 to .007 in. (.076 to .178 mm) and must
not vary more than .002 in. (.05 mm) between points
checked (Fig. 53).
If the backlash is not in this range, move the shims which
are located beneath the differential bearings, from one
side to the other until the correct backlash is attained.
23.Check ring to pinion gear engagement (see Ring and
Pinion Gear Engagement in this chapter).
Figure 53
24.Apply silicone sealant between the front and rear
axle housings and install the eight (8) housing cap
screws. Tighten the cap screws to a torque from 18 to
23 ft-lb (24 to 31 N−m) (Fig. 54).
25.Install the right and left-hand axle assemblies (See
Front Axle Shafts and Bearings Assembly in this section).
Figure 54
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 28
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Ring to Pinion Gear Engagement (Front Axle)
Final position of front axle pinion is verified by using the
gear contact pattern method as described in the following procedure.
PROFILE
TOP LAND
GEAR TOOTH DEFINITIONS (Fig. 55):
TOE
Toe - the portion of the tooth surface at the end towards the center.
LENGTHWISE
BEARING
ARC
HEEL
Heel - the portion of the gear tooth at the outer end.
Top Land - top surface of tooth.
1. Paint the teeth of the ring gear, both drive and coast
side, with a gear marking compound, such as DyKem
Steel Blue.
2. While applying a light load to the ring gear, rotate the
pinion gear until the ring gear has made one complete
revolution. The drive side pattern should be located at
the toe portion of the tooth. The coast pattern should
also be at the toe portion of the tooth (Fig. 56).
ROOT
Figure 55
DRIVE SIDE
COAST SIDE
Heel
Heel
Toe
Toe
Study the patterns in the following illustrations and correct engagement as necessary.
NOTE: When making changes, note that two variables
are involved. Example: If you have the backlash set correctly to specifications and you change the pinion position shim, you may have to readjust backlash to the
correct specification before checking the pattern.
DRIVE SIDE
Heel
Toe
When a change in backlash is required, backlash shims
should be changed in the range of 1-1/2 times the
amount of backlash required to bring the gears into
specification. For example, if the backlash needed to be
changed by .004 in. (.10 mm), the shim pack should be
changed by .006 in. (.15 mm) as a starting point.
High backlash is corrected by moving the ring gear closer to the pinion. Low backlash is corrected by moving the
ring gear away from the pinion. These corrections are
made by switching shims from one side of the differential
case to the other.
COAST SIDE
Heel
Toe
Figure 57
DRIVE SIDE
COAST SIDE
Heel
Heel
Toe
Toe
Drive
Axles
Every gear has a characteristic pattern. The illustrations
show typical patterns only and explain how patterns shift
as gear location is changed. When making pinion position changes, shims should be changed in the range of
.002 to .004 in. (.05 to .10 mm) until a correct pattern has
been obtained.
Figure 56
Example 1: Backlash correct. Thicker pinion position
shims required (Fig. 57).
Example 2: Backlash correct. Thinner pinion position
shims required (Fig. 58).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 29
Figure 58
Drive Axles
Example 3: Backlash incorrect. Thinner pinion position
shim required. Adjust backlash to match (Fig. 59).
DRIVE SIDE
COAST SIDE
Heel
GEAR PATTERN MOVEMENT SUMMARY:
Heel
Toe
Toe
A. Decreasing backlash moves the ring gear closer
to the pinion.
Drive pattern (convex side of gear) moves lower
and toward the toe.
Coast pattern (concave side of gear) moves
slightly higher and toward the heel.
Figure 59
B. Increasing backlash moves the ring gear away
from the pinion.
Drive pattern (convex side of gear) moves higher
and toward the heel.
Coast pattern (concave side of gear) moves
slightly lower and toward the toe.
C. Thicker pinion position shim with the backlash
constant moves the pinion closer to the ring gear.
Drive pattern (convex side of gear) moves deeper
on the tooth (flank contact) and slightly toward the
toe.
Coast pattern (concave side of gear) moves
deeper on the tooth and toward the heel.
D. Thinner pinion position shim with backlash
constant moves the pinion further from the ring gear.
Drive pattern (convex side of gear) moves toward
the top of the tooth (face contact) and toward the
heel.
Coast pattern (concave side of gear) moves toward the top of the tooth (face contact) and toward the heel.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 30
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Drive
Axles
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 31
Drive Axles
Rear Axle Drive Shaft (4 Wheel Drive)
2
ALIGN YOKES
RIGHT
FRONT
3
4
1
6
5
5
6
2
8
10
7
9
9
8
Figure 60
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bidirectional clutch
Yoke flange
Grease fitting
Yoke and shaft
5. Grease fitting
6. Cross and bearing kit
7. Front axle flange
8. Lock washer (6 per flange)
9. Socket head screw (6 per flange)
10. Yoke and tube
Removal (Fig. 60)
Installation (Fig. 60)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT: If the drive shaft tube and shaft were
separated, make sure that the drive shaft yokes are
aligned when the tube and shaft are assembled (Fig.
60). Misalignment of the yokes will result in shortened drive shaft life and will cause unnecessary
vibration.
2. Support drive shaft to prevent it from falling.
3. Disconnect front yoke flange of drive shaft from front
axle flange by removing six (6) socket head screws and
lock washers.
1. Position rear axle drive shaft to machine. Make sure
that drive shaft tube (item 10) is toward rear axle.
4. Disconnect rear yoke flange of drive shaft from bidirectional clutch by removing six (6) socket head
screws and lock washers.
2. Secure yokes of drive shaft to front axle flange and
bidirectional clutch with removed fasteners.
5. Remove rear axle drive shaft from machine.
3. Lubricate drive shaft grease fittings (see Traction
Unit Operator’s Manual).
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 32
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Rear Axle Drive Shaft Cross and Bearing Service (4 Wheel Drive)
1. Remove rear axle drive shaft from vehicle (see Rear
Axle Drive Shaft (4 Wheel Drive) Removal in this section).
4
3
2
2. Remove snap rings that secure bearings in yokes.
1
IMPORTANT: Yokes must be supported when removing and installing bearings to prevent damage.
3. Use a press to remove cross and bearings from
yokes. Thoroughly clean drive shaft yokes.
4. To install new cross and bearings:
A. Apply a coating of grease to bearing bores in end
yoke and shaft yoke.
3
B. Press one bearing partially into yoke.
Figure 61
C. Insert cross into yoke and bearing.
D. Hold cross in alignment and press bearing in until
it hits the yoke.
1. End yoke
2. Cross and bearing kit
3. Snap ring (4 used)
4. Shaft yoke
E. Install snap ring into yoke groove to secure
installed bearing.
F. Place second bearing into yoke bore and onto
cross shaft. Press bearing into yoke and secure with
snap ring.
G. Repeat procedure for other yoke.
H. Grease cross until grease comes out of all four (4)
cups.
5. Make sure that assembled joint moves without binding. Slight binding can usually be eliminated by lightly
rapping the yoke lugs with a soft faced hammer. If binding continues, disassemble joint to identify source of
binding.
Drive
Axles
6. Install drive shaft to vehicle (see Rear Axle Drive
Shaft (4Wheel Drive) Installation in this section).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 33
Drive Axles
Rear Axle (4 Wheel Drive)
34 to 42 ft−lb
(46 to 57 N−m)
26
27
38
37
21
39
36
25
22
36
35
30
29
24
23
20
19
28 33
32
31
12
35
40
34
28
41 30
42
18
17
Loctite #242
16 15
14
43
2
13
37
29
45
44
46
90 to 120 ft−lb
(122 to 163 N−m)
1
10 9
11
7
6
5
4
3
48
8
Antiseize
Lubricant
RIGHT
70 to 90 ft−lb
(95 to 122 N−m)
FRONT
70 to 90 ft−lb
(95 to 122 N−m)
47
Figure 62
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Clutch locator adapter
Cap screw (2 used)
Cap screw (2 used)
Bidirectional clutch
Spacer
Flat washer
Lock washer
Cap screw
Lock washer (6 used)
Socket head screw (6 used)
Driveshaft assembly
Cap screw
Axle stop
Lock nut
Flat washer
Oscillation stop
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Thrust washer
Jam nut
Lock nut
Flange head screw (4 used)
Lock nut (4 used)
Axle support
Axle pin
Washer head screw
Grease fitting
Cap screw (4 used)
Rear bumper
Tie rod end
Slotted hex nut
Cotter pin
Flange bushing (2 used)
Thrust washer (as needed)
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
Thrust washer (as needed)
Steering cylinder support bracket
Steering cylinder ball joint
Retaining ring
Grease fitting
Steering cylinder
Grease fitting
Tie rod
Cap screw (4 used)
Washer (4 used)
Jam nut (4 used)
Cap screw (2 used)
Lock nut (2 used)
Wheel assembly
Lug nut
Rear axle assembly
NOTE: For repair information regarding the rear axle
on 2 wheel drive machines, refer to Chapter 7 − Chassis.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 34
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 62)
Installation (Fig. 62)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Position rear axle support to axle. Install thrust washers (items 32 and 33) between axle boss and axle support to minimize clearance.
2. Drain oil from rear axle (see Traction Unit Operator’s
Manual).
2. Install axle pin (item 23) to secure axle to rear axle
support. Install thrust washer (item 17) and jam nut (item
18) onto pivot pin. Torque jam nut from 90 to 120 ft−lb
(122 to 163 N−m). Secure pivot pin to axle support with
washer head screw (item 24).
CAUTION
When changing attachments, tires, or performing other service, use correct blocks, hoists,
and jacks. Make sure machine is parked on a
solid, level surface such as a concrete floor.
Prior to raising machine, remove any attachments that may interfere with the safe and
proper raising of the machine. Always chock or
block wheels. Use jack stands or solid wood
blocks to support the raised machine. If the machine is not properly supported by blocks or
jack stands, the machine may move or fall,
which may result in personal injury.
3. Chock front wheels and jack up rear of machine (see
Jacking Instructions in Chapter 1 − Safety). Support machine with jack stands or solid wood blocks.
3. Position axle and axle support under machine with a
jack. Raise assembly to machine frame and align
mounting holes of axle support and machine frame.
4. Secure rear axle support to frame with four (4) flange
head screws (item 20) and two (2) cap screws (item 26)
with lock nuts (item 21).
5. Install steering cylinder to axle assembly (see Steering Cylinder Installation in Service and Repairs section
of Chapter 5 − Hydraulic System).
6. Position end of driveshaft to bidirectional clutch on
rear axle. Secure driveshaft to clutch with six (6) socket
head screws (item 10) and lock washers (item 9).
WARNING
4. Remove wheels from rear axle.
6. Remove steering cylinder from rear axle (see Steering Cylinder Removal in Service and Repairs section of
Chapter 5 − Hydraulic System).
Failure to maintain proper wheel lug nut
torque could result in failure or loss of wheel
and may result in personal injury.
7. Install wheels to axle. Torque wheel lug nuts from 70
to 90 ft−lb (95 to 122 N−m).
8. Lower machine to ground.
7. If machine has rear weight(s) attached to frame, remove weight(s).
9. If equipped with rear weight(s), attach weight(s) to
rear of machine.
8. Support rear axle to prevent it from falling. Remove
two (2) cap screws (item 26) with lock nuts (item 21) and
then four (4) flange head screws (item 20) that secure
rear axle support to equipment frame. Lower rear axle
and rear axle support from machine.
10.Fill axle and input gearbox with SAE 80W−90 weight
gear lube (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
9. Remove jam nut (item 18) and thrust washer (item
17) from axle pin (item 23) that attaches rear axle to rear
axle support. Remove washer head screw (item 24) that
secures flange of axle pin to rear axle support.
12.Check rear wheel toe−in and adjust if necessary (see
Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
10.Remove axle pin. Separate rear axle support from
rear axle. Note location of thrust washers on both ends
of axle mounting boss.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
11. Start engine and check for component interference
as steering wheel is turned from lock to lock.
13.Check steering stop bolt adjustment on both sides of
axle. At full RH and LH turns, a gap of 0.088” (2.2 mm)
should exist between bevel gear case casting and stop
bolt on axle case.
Page 8 − 35 Rev. A
Drive Axles
Drive
Axles
5. Remove six (6) socket head screws (item 10) and
lock washers (item 9) that secure driveshaft to bidirectional clutch on rear axle. Position end of driveshaft
away from clutch.
Bevel Gear Case and Axle Case (4 Wheel Drive Axle)
The following procedures assume the 4WD rear axle assembly has been removed from the machine.
35 to 41 ft−lb
(47 to 56 N−m)
Removal
1
6
5
1. Remove the mounting screws, nuts and lock washers. Remove the bevel gear case/axle case assembly
and O-ring from the axle support (Fig. 63).
4
2
2. Mark both right and left bevel gear case/axle case
assemblies.
3
35 to 41 ft−lb
(47 to 56 N−m)
IMPORTANT: Do not interchange right and left bevel gear case/axle case assemblies.
Figure 63
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. Bevel gear case/axle
case assembly
6. O-ring
Cap screw
Lock nut
Lock washer
Axle support
3. Remove the axle cover mounting screws. Remove
the axle cover from the axle case as an assembly
(Fig. 64).
17 to 20 ft−lb
(23 to 27 N−m)
1
4
3
2
Figure 64
1. Axle case
2. Axle cover assembly
4. Remove the axle case support mounting screws, the
axle case support and the support shims (Fig. 65).
3. Mounting screw
4. O-ring
57 to 67 ft−lb
(77 to 91 N−m)
2
3
Threadlocking
Compound
4
1
Figure 65
1. Axle case
2. Axle case support
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 36
3. Mounting screw
4. Support shim
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
5. Remove the knuckle pin mounting screws and the
knuckle pin. Remove and discard o−ring (Fig. 66).
6. While holding the bevel gear case, lightly tap the upper end of the bevel gear shaft out of the upper bearing
and upper bevel gear.
7. Pull the bevel gear case from the axle case and remove the upper bevel gear, collar, spacer and thrust
washer from the gear case.
17 to 20 ft−lb
(23 to 27 N−m)
1
Threadlocking
Compound
3
5
4
7
9
8. Remove the axle case cover screws, cover and Oring from the axle case.
2
13
8
9. Remove the plug and sealing washer (not shown)
from the center of the axle case cover. While holding the
axle case cover, lightly tap the lower end of the bevel
gear shaft out of the lower bearing and lower bevel gear.
10
6
10.Remove and discard bevel gear shaft seals from
bevel gear case and axle case (Fig. 66).
15
11
12
14
17 to 20 ft−lb
(23 to 27 N−m)
Figure 66
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Knuckle pin
Shaft seals
O−ring
Bevel gear case
Upper bearing
Bevel gear shaft
Collar
Spacer
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Upper bevel gear
Thrust washer
Lower bevel gear
Lower bearing
Axle case
Axle case cover
O-ring
Inspection
1. Measure the knuckle pin O.D. and the axle case support bushing I.D. to determine the bushing to pin clearance (Fig. 67). Replace components as necessary.
1
2
BUSHING TO PIN CLEARANCE:
0.002 to 0.016 in. (0.05 to 0.40 mm)
KNUCKLE PIN O.D. (Factory Spec.):
0.982 to 0.983 in. (24.95 to 24.98 mm)
AXLE CASE SUPPORT BUSHING I.D.
(Factory Spec.):
0.984 to 0.987 in. (25.00 to 25.08 mm)
2. Inspect all gears, shafts, bearings, cases and covers
for damage and wear. Replace components as necessary.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 37
2. Axle case support
Drive Axles
Drive
Axles
Figure 67
1. Knuckle pin
Installation
1. Coat new shaft seals with grease and install in axle
case and bevel gear case as shown (Fig. 68).
3
2
1
Figure 68
1. Axle case
2. Bevel gear case
2. Install the lower bevel gear and bevel gear shaft in
the axle case cover. Coat a new o-ring with grease and
install the axle case cover (Fig. 69). Tighten cover
screws from 17 to 20 ft-lb (23 to 27 N−m).
3. Shaft seal
9
10
3. Slide the bevel gear case over the bevel gear shaft
and install the thrust washer, spacer, bevel gear and collar. Make sure the bevel gear shaft is completely seated
in the upper and lower bearings (Fig. 69).
8
7
4. Install new o−ring and then knuckle pin. Use medium
strength Loctite thread locker and tighten the knuckle
pin mounting screws from 17 to 20 ft-lb (23 to 27 N−m).
6
5
3
2
1
4
Figure 69
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 38
Axle case cover
Lower bevel gear
Bevel gear shaft
Lower bearing
Thrust washer
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Spacer
Upper bevel gear
Collar
Upper bearing
Knuckle pin
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
5. Determine necessary quantity of support shims.
4
A. Lubricate the axle case support bushing with a
thin coat of grease and slide axle case support onto
knuckle pin.
B. Position support shims that were removed during
disassembly between axle case support and axle
case. Install mounting screws into axle case. Slowly
tighten screws while frequently checking for clearance (vertical endplay) between axle case support
and knuckle pin. If binding of components is noted
before screws are fully tightened, add additional support shims. Torque screws from 57 to 67 ft−lb (77 to
91 N−m).
C. Use dial indicator to measure vertical endplay of
axle case (Fig. 70).
57 to 67 ft−lb
(77 to 91 N−m)
1
VERTICAL
ENDPLAY
6
5
2
3
Figure 70
1. Axle case support
2. Axle case
3. Bevel gearcase
4. Dial indicator
5. Knuckle pin
6. Support shim location
AXLE CASE ASSEMBLY ENDPLAY:
0.001 to 0.008 in. (0.02 to 0.20 mm)
3
D. Adjust endplay by increasing or reducing number
of axle case support shims.
2
1
NOTE: Axle case support shims are available in
0.004 in. (0.10 mm), 0.008 in. (0.20 mm) and 0.016
in. (0.40 mm) thickness.
4
6. After correct support shims have been determined,
remove mounting screws and apply heavy strength
thread−locking compound to screw threads. Reinstall
screws and torque from 57 to 67 ft−lb (77 to 91 N−m).
5
IMPORTANT: Correct engagement between bevel
gears is critical to axle performance and durability.
7. Temporarily install the bevel gear case/axle case assembly on the axle support. Position a dial indicator at
the tooths center. Prevent the axle from turning and
measure the upper bevel gear to differential shaft gear
backlash (Fig. 71).
Figure 71
1. Axle support
2. Upper bevel gear
3. Differential shaft gear
4. Dial indicator
5. Axle bearing shims
4
UPPER BEVEL GEAR BACKLASH:
0.004 to 0.016 in. (0.10 to 0.40 mm)
5
1
8. Adjust backlash by increasing or reducing axle bearing shim thickness (see Differential Shafts in this section
of this manual).
2
3
Figure 72
1. Axle cover assembly
2. Lower bevel gear
3. Axle gear
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 39
4. Dial indicator
5. Axle bearing shims
Drive Axles
Drive
Axles
NOTE: Axle bearing shims are available in 0.004 in.
(0.10 mm), 0.008 in. (0.20 mm) and 0.020 in. (0.50 mm)
thickness.
9. Remove the bevel gear case/axle case assembly
from the axle support. Coat a new O-ring with grease
and temporarily install the axle cover assembly. Position
a dial indicator at the tooths center. Prevent the axle
from turning and measure the lower bevel gear to axle
gear backlash (Fig. 72).
LOWER BEVEL GEAR BACKLASH:
0.004 to 0.016 in. (0.10 to 0.40 mm)
10.Adjust backlash by increasing or reducing axle bearing shim thickness (see Axle Shafts in this section of this
manual).
NOTE: Axle bearing shims are available in 0.008 in.
(0.20 mm), 0.012 in. (0.30 mm) and 0.020 in. (0.50 mm)
thickness.
11. Tighten axle cover screws from 17 to 20 ft-lb (23 to
27 N−m).
12.Coat a new O-ring with grease and install the bevel
gear case/axle case assembly on the axle support.
Tighten mounting screws and nuts from 35 to 41 ft-lb (47
to 56 N−m) (Fig. 73).
Differential Shafts (4 Wheel Drive Axle)
The following procedures assume the 4WD rear axle assembly has been removed from the machine.
35 to 41 ft−lb
(47 to 56 N−m)
Removal
1
6
IMPORTANT: Do not interchange right and left differential shafts assemblies. Mark right and left
shafts before disassembly.
5
4
2
1. Remove the mounting screws, nuts and lock washers. Remove the bevel gear case/axle case assembly
and O-ring from the axle support (Fig. 73).
3
35 to 41 ft−lb
(47 to 56 N−m)
2. Mark and pull the differential shaft assembly from the
axle support.
3. Remove the retaining ring and bevel gear (Fig 74).
4. Drive the differential shaft out of the bearings. Remove the bearings and bearing shims.
Figure 73
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cap screw
Lock nut
Lock washer
Axle support
5. Bevel gear case/axle
case assembly
6. O-ring
5. Inspect all gears, shafts, bearings and cases for
damage and wear. Replace components as necessary.
Installation
6
3
1. Press bearings onto differential shaft. Place correct
combination of bearing shims in axle support and drive
differential shaft and bearing assembly into axle support.
5
4
2
1
2. Install bevel gear and retaining ring.
3. Coat new O-ring with grease. Align differential shaft
splines with differential gear assembly and slide differential shaft assembly onto axle support.
4. Install bevel gear case/axle case assembly (see
Bevel Gear Case/Axle Case Assembly in this section of
this manual).
Drive Axles
Figure 74
1. Retaining ring
2. Bevel gear
3. Differential shaft
Page 8 − 40
4. Bearing
5. Bearing shims
6. O-ring
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Axle Shafts (4 Wheel Drive Axle)
The following procedures assume the 4WD rear axle assembly has been removed from the machine.
17 to 20 ft−lb
(23 to 27 N−m)
Removal
1
4
3
1. Remove the axle cover mounting screws. Remove
the axle cover from the axle case as an assembly
(Fig. 75).
2. Use a bearing puller to remove the bearing and bevel
gear as shown (Fig. 76).
3. Remove the shims, spacer and retaining ring. Drive
the axle out of the bearing and cover. Remove and discard the axle shaft seal.
2
Figure 75
1. Axle case
2. Axle cover assembly
3. Mounting screw
4. O-ring
4. Inspect all gears, shafts, bearings, spacers and
cases for damage and wear. Replace components as
necessary.
Installation
1
1. Coat new axle shaft seal with grease and install in
axle cover as shown (Fig. 77).
2
2. Press the axle cover and bearing assembly onto the
axle shaft. Press only on the inner race of the cover
bearing (Fig. 77).
4
3
5
3. Install retaining ring, spacer, and correct combination of bearing shims. Install bevel gear and bearing.
4. Coat a new O-ring with grease and install the axle
cover assembly. Tighten axle cover screws from 17 to 20
ft-lb (23 to 27 N−m).
Figure 76
1. Bearing
2. Bevel gear
3. Shims
4. Spacer
5. Retaining ring
1
4
3
Drive
Axles
2
Figure 77
1. Axle shaft seal
2. Axle cover
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 41
3. Bearing
4. Axle shaft
Drive Axles
Input Shaft/Pinion Gear (4 Wheel Drive Axle)
The following procedures assume the 4WD rear axle assembly has been removed from the machine.
Removal (Fig. 78)
7
1. Remove input shaft/pinion gear assembly from the
axle support. Remove the shims and bearing case Oring.
5
2. Release the stake washer and remove the lock nut.
Remove and discard the stake washer.
4
3. Drive the input shaft/pinion gear out from the outer
bearing cone and bearing case. Remove and discard
the oil seal and O-ring.
8
4. Inspect all gears, shafts, bearings, spacers and
cases for damage and wear. Replace components as
necessary.
3
NOTE: Replacement input shaft/pinion gears are only
available in matched ring and pinion sets.
6
9
Installation (Fig. 78)
10
NOTE: When installing new bearing cones, press only
on the inner race of the bearing cone.
11
2
1. If the inner bearing cone was removed, press a new
bearing cone all the way onto the input shaft/pinion gear.
2. Place the shaft and bearing assembly in the bearing
case and install the outer bearing cone.
NOTE: The bearings must be completely seated.
There should be no input shaft/pinion gear end play.
1
Figure 78
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lock nut
Stake washer
Bearing case
Bearing case O-ring
Inner bearing
Outer bearing
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Input shaft/pinion gear
Bearing case shims
Seal collar
O-ring
Oil seal
3. Coat a new oil seal with grease and install as shown
in Figure 79.
4. Coat a new O-ring with grease. Install O-ring in the
seal collar and install the collar.
5. Install a new stake washer. Install the lock nut finger
tight.
0.040 in. (1.0 mm)
2
6. Set the bearing preload by securing the bearing case
in a vise. Thread a M12 x 1.5 hex head cap screw into
the splined end of the input shaft/pinion gear.
1
7. Slowly tighten the lock nut until 4.0 to 6.0 in-lb (0.4 to
0.7 N−m) of force is required to rotate the input shaft/pinion gear in the bearing case.
8. Secure the lock nut with the stake washer.
Figure 79
1. Oil seal
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 42
2. Bearing case
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
9. Use a depth gauge to measure the distance from the
end face of the input shaft/pinion gear to the mating surface of the bearing case. Subtract the “Design Cone
Center Distance” from this distance to determine initial
shim thickness (Fig. NO TAG).
1
Design
Cone Center
Distance
DESIGN CONE CENTER DISTANCE
(distance from mating surface of axle support to end
face of pinion gear):
1.870 + 0.002 in. (47.50 + 0.05 mm)
2
NOTE: Bearing case shims are available in 0.004 in.
(0.10 mm) and 0.008 in. (0.20 mm) thickness.
10.Coat a new O-ring with grease. Place shims on the
bearing case and temporarily install input shaft/pinion
gear assembly into axle case. Tighten mounting screws
from 35 to 41 ft-lb (47 to 56 N−m).
Figure 80
1. Input shaft/pinion gear
2. Bearing case
11. Insert a screwdriver through the drain plug hole to
hold ring gear and measure the pinion gear to ring gear
backlash (Fig. 81).
1
PINION GEAR TO RING GEAR BACKLASH:
0.004 to 0.016 in. (0.10 to 0.40 mm)
12.Adjust backlash by increasing or reducing bearing
case shim thickness.
3
13.Check pinion gear to ring gear engagement (see Pinion Gear to Ring Gear Engagement in this section of this
manual).
4
Figure 81
1. Axle case
2. Screwdriver
3. Dial indicator
4. Input shaft/pinion gear
Drive
Axles
14.Place the correct combination of shims on the bearing case. Tighten mounting screws from 35 to 41 ft-lb (47
to 56 N−m).
2
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 43
Drive Axles
Differential Gear Assembly (4 Wheel Drive Axle)
The following procedures assume the 4WD rear axle assembly has been removed from the machine.
5
35 to 41 ft−lb
(47 to 56 N−m)
7
6
Removal
1
1. Remove bevel gear case/axle case assemblies (see
Bevel Gear Case/Axle Case Assembly in this section of
this manual).
2
IMPORTANT: Do not interchange right and left differential shafts assemblies.
4
2. Mark the differential shaft assemblies for assembly
purposes. Pull the differential shaft assemblies from the
axle support.
3. Remove input shaft/pinion gear assembly, shims
and O-ring from the axle support (Fig. 82).
4. Remove the axle support case screws. Separate the
axle support halves and remove the O-ring.
3
Figure 82
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pinion gear assembly
O-ring
Axle support (right)
Axle support (left)
5. Case screws
6. Differential gear assy.
7. O-ring
5. Remove the differential gear assembly, bearings and
adjusting shims from the axle case.
2
1
6. Drive the spring pin from the differential case with a
punch and hammer. Discard the spring pin (Fig. 83).
NOTE: Mark and arrange all components so they can
be reassembled in their original position.
7. Remove the differential pinion shaft, pinion gears
and pinion washers. Remove the differential side gears
and side gear shims. Remove the ring gear only if it will
be replaced (Fig. 84).
NOTE: Replacement ring gears are only available in
matched ring and pinion sets.
Figure 83
1. Differential case
2. Spring pin
1
3
2
5
22 to 25 ft−lb
(30 to 34 N−m)
4
4
5
2
3
Threadlocking
Compound
7
6
Figure 84
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 44
Differential pinion shaft
Pinion gear
Pinion washer
Side gear
5. Side gear shims
6. Ring gear
7. Differential case
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Inspection
1. Measure the differential side gear O.D. and the differential case I.D. to determine the side gear to case
clearance (Fig. 85). Replace components as necessary.
SIDE GEAR TO CASE CLEARANCE:
0.002 to 0.012 in. (0.05 to 0.30 mm)
1
SIDE GEAR O.D. (Factory Spec.):
1.335 to 1.337 in. (33.91 to 33.95 mm)
DIFFERENTIAL CASE I.D. (Factory Spec.):
1.339 to 1.341 in. (34.00 to 34.06 mm)
2
2. Measure the differential pinion shaft O.D. and the
pinion gear I.D. to determine the pinion shaft to pinion
gear clearance (Fig. 86). Replace components as necessary.
PINION SHAFT TO PINION GEAR CLEARANCE:
0.001 to 0.010 in. (0.03 to 0.25 mm)
PINION SHAFT O.D. (Factory Spec.):
0.550 to 0.551 in. (13.97 to 13.98 mm)
Figure 85
1. Side gear
2. Differential case
PINION GEAR I.D. (Factory Spec.):
0.551 to 0.552 in. (14.00 to 14.02 mm)
3. Inspect all gears, shafts, bearings, cases and covers
for damage and wear. Replace components as necessary.
1
2
Figure 86
2. Pinion gear
Drive
Axles
1. Pinion shaft
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 45
Drive Axles
Installation
3
1. If the ring gear was removed from the differential
case, use medium strength Loctite thread locker and
tighten the mounting screws from 22 to 25 ft-lb (30 to
34 N−m).
2
1
2. Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant (Three Bond
1901 or equivalent) to the splines and bearing surfaces
of the differential pinion gears, pinion washers and side
gears.
3. Install the side gear shims and side gears in their
original location in the differential case.
4. Place the differential pinion gears and pinion washers in their original location in the differential case. Temporarily install the differential pinion shaft.
Figure 87
1. Vise
2. Differential gear case
3. Dial indicator
More than 35% total tooth contact
5. Secure the differential case in a soft jawed vise. Position a dial indicator on a tooth of the differential pinion
gear. Press the pinion and side gear against the differential case and measure the pinion gear to side gear backlash (Fig. 87).
PINION GEAR TO SIDE GEAR BACKLASH:
0.004 to 0.016 in. (0.10 to 0.40 mm)
1/3 to 1/2 of entire width
from small end of tooth
6. Adjust backlash by increasing or reducing side gear
shim thickness.
NOTE: Side gear shims are available in 0.043 in. (1.10
mm), 0.047 in. (1.20 mm) and 0.051 in. (1.30 mm) thickness.
7. Apply gear marking compound, such as DyKem
Steel Blue lightly over several gear teeth.
8. While applying a light load to either side gear, rotate
either pinion gear until the side gears have made one
complete revolution.
9. Ideal tooth contact should cover more than 35% of
each tooth surface. The contact area should be in the
center of each tooth and extend 1/3 to 1/2 way across
each tooth from the toe (small) end (Fig. 88).
10.Adjust side gear shims if necessary to correct tooth
contact. Recheck differential pinion gear to side gear
backlash if any changes are made.
Figure 88
12.Install differential gear assembly in right side axle
support half.
13.Coat a new o-ring with grease and install left side
axle support half. Tighten axle support case screws from
35 to 41 ft-lb (47 to 56 N−m).
14.Install input shaft/pinion gear assembly (see Input
Shaft/Pinion Gear in this section of this manual).
15.Coat new o-rings with grease, align differential shaft
splines with differential gear assembly and slide differential shaft assemblies onto axle support.
16.Install bevel gear case/axle case assemblies (see
Bevel Gear Case/Axle Case Assembly in this section of
this manual).
11. After backlash and tooth contact have been adjusted, align the hole in the differential pinion shaft with
the hole in the differential case and install a new spring
pin.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 46
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Pinion Gear to Ring Gear Engagement (4 Wheel Drive Axle)
The final position of the pinion gear is verified by using
the gear contact pattern method as described in the following procedure.
PROFILE
TOP LAND
GEAR TOOTH DEFINITIONS (Fig. 89):
TOE
Toe − the portion of the tooth surface at the end towards the center.
LENGTHWISE
BEARING
ARC
HEEL
Heel − the portion of the gear tooth at the outer end.
Top Land − top surface of tooth.
1. Paint the teeth of the ring gear, both drive and coast
side, with a gear marking compound, such as DyKem
Steel Blue.
ROOT
Figure 89
2. Install the input shaft/pinion gear assembly into axle
case.
More than 35% total tooth contact
3. While applying a light load to the ring gear, rotate the
pinion gear in the direction of forward travel until the ring
gear has made one complete revolution.
Ideal tooth contact observed on the ring gear should
cover more than 35% of each tooth surface. The contact
area should be in the center of each tooth and extend 1/3
to 1/2 way across each tooth from the toe end (Fig. 90).
1/3 to 1/2 of entire width
from small end of tooth
Figure 90
Adjustments to the gear contact position are made by
moving the input shaft/pinion gear (bearing case shims)
or by moving the differential gear case (differential bearing shims) (Fig. 91).
4
3
NOTE: Bearing case shims are available in 0.004 in.
(0.10 mm) and 0.008 in. (0.20 mm) thickness.
NOTE: Differential bearing shims are available in
0.004 in. (0.10 mm), 0.008 in. (0.20 mm) and 0.016 in.
(0.40 mm) thickness.
Study the different contact patterns (Figs. 92 and 93)
and correct gear engagement as necessary.
2
NOTE: When making changes, note that two variables
are involved (see Gear Pattern Movement Summary in
this section of this manual).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Figure 91
1. Input shaft/pinion gear
2. Bearing case shims
3. Differential gear case
Page 8 − 47
4. Differential bearing
shims
Drive
Axles
Example: If the pinion gear to ring gear backlash is set
correctly to specifications and the bearing case shim is
changed to adjust tooth contact, it may be necessary to
readjust backlash to the correct specification before
checking the contact pattern.
1
Drive Axles
Gear Pattern Movement Summary
Heel Contact
Base Contact
Every gear has a characteristic pattern. The illustrations
show typical patterns only and explain how patterns shift
as gear location is changed.
1. If contact is toward the heel or base of the gear (Fig.
92):
A. Install thicker or additional bearing case shim(s)
to move pinion shaft toward ring gear.
Figure 92
B. Install thinner or remove differential bearing
shim(s) to move ring gear backward.
Toe Contact
Tip Contact
C. Repeat until proper tooth contact and pinion gear
to ring gear backlash are correct.
2. If contact is toward the toe or tip of the gear (Fig. 93):
A. Install thinner or remove bearing case shim(s) to
move pinion shaft away from ring gear.
B. Install thicker or additional differential bearing
shim(s) to move ring gear forward.
Figure 93
C. Repeat until proper tooth contact and pinion gear
to ring gear backlash are correct.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 48
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Drive
Axles
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 49
Drive Axles
Bidirectional Clutch (4 Wheel Drive)
RIGHT
FRONT
2
10
1
9
5
4
3
6
11
7
12
8
Loctite #242
Anti−seize
Lubricant
Figure 94
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clutch locator adapter
Cap screw (2 used)
Cap screw (2 used)
Bidirectional clutch
5.
6.
7.
8.
Spacer
Flat washer
Lock washer
Cap screw
9.
10.
11.
12.
Lock washer (6 used)
Socket head screw (6 used)
Drive shaft assembly
Rear axle assembly
Removal (Fig. 94)
Installation (Fig. 94)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Apply anti−seize lubricant to splines of rear axle input shaft.
2. Drain oil from bidirectional clutch (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
3. Remove six (6) socket head screws (item 10) and
lock washers (item 9) that secure driveshaft to bidirectional clutch on rear axle. Position end of driveshaft
away from clutch.
4. Remove cap screw (item 8), lock washer (item 7) and
flat washer (item 6) that secure clutch to rear axle. Locate and retrieve spacer (item 5).
2. Slide bidirectional clutch onto rear axle input shaft.
Align notches in clutch housing with cap screw heads on
axle clutch locator adapter.
3. Apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads of cap
screw (item 8) that secures clutch to rear axle shaft.
4. Secure clutch to axle shaft with cap screw, lock
washer (item 7), flat washer (item 6) and spacer (item 5).
5. Position end of driveshaft to bidirectional clutch on
rear axle. Secure driveshaft to clutch with six (6) socket
head screws (item 10) and lock washers (item 9).
5. Pull bidirectional clutch from rear axle input shaft.
6. Fill clutch with oil to the proper level (see Traction
Unit Operator’s Manual).
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 50
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Drive
Axles
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 8 − 51
Drive Axles
Bidirectional Clutch Service (4 Wheel Drive)
Hylomar Jointing
Compound
1
DRIVE
SHAFT
4
6
10
3
12
REAR
AXLE
2
5
14
14 ft−lb
(19 N−m)
7
16
8
18
9
11
13
15
17
Figure 95
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
End plate
Socket head screw (6 used)
Oil seal
Snap ring
Bearing
Housing
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Phillips head screw w/o−ring
Hub
Needle bearing
Thrust washer
Wave spring
Roller cage assembly
Disassembly (Fig. 95)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Oil seal
Bearing Housing
Bearing
Snap ring
Retaining ring
Oil seal
3. When installing oil seals, make sure that seal lips are
facing in.
1. Thoroughly clean exterior of clutch before disassembly.
2. Disassemble clutch using Figure 95 as a guide.
Assembly (Fig. 95)
1. Lightly lubricate clutch components with clean Mobil
Fluid 424 before assembly.
4. Apply Hylomar Jointing Compound (or equivalent) to
end plate (item 1) mating surface before installing end
plate.
5. Secure end plate with six (6) socket head cap
screws. Torque screws 14 ft−lb (19 N−m).
2. Assemble clutch using Figure 95 as a guide.
Drive Axles
Page 8 − 52
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
P.T.O. System
Table of Contents
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
P.T.O. Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
P.T.O. Drive Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
P.T.O. Drive Shaft Cross and Bearing Service . . . 6
P.T.O. Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Align P.T.O. Pulley to Electric Clutch Pulley . . . . 10
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 9 − 1
P.T.O. System
P.T.O.
System
Chapter 9
Service and Repairs
P.T.O. Drive Belt
14
15
10
13
12
11
7
6
5
10
8
4
3
9
FRONT
2
RIGHT
1
Figure 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Electric clutch
P.T.O. drive belt
Cap screw
Lock washer
Flat washer
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
P.T.O. shaft pulley
P.T.O. tension shaft
P.T.O. shaft
Lock nut
Flat washer
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Mounting bracket
Spacer
Compression spring
Cap screw
Engine (diesel engine shown)
NOTE: Refer to Traction Unit Operator’s Manual for information regarding P.T.O. Belt Adjustment and Installation.
P.T.O. System
Page 9 − 2
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
P.T.O.
System
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 9 − 3
P.T.O. System
P.T.O. Drive Shaft
RIGHT
FRONT
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
14
3
12
6
13
12
9
10
11
Figure 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
P.T.O. shaft
End yoke
Lock nut (2 used per end yoke)
Grease fitting
Slip shaft yoke
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
U−joint kit (cross and bearings)
Flat washer (2 used)
Gearbox bracket (2 used)
Cutting deck gearbox
End yoke
11.
12.
13.
14.
Roll pin
Cap screw (2 used per end yoke)
Slip tube yoke
Cotter pin
WARNING
Do not start the engine and engage the P.T.O.
switch when the P.T.O. drive shaft is disconnected from the cutting deck (or implement). If
the engine is started and the P.T.O. shaft is allowed to rotate, serious personal injury and
machine damage could result. Disconnect the
P.T.O. electric clutch electrical connector
whenever the P.T.O. drive shaft is disconnected from the cutting deck (or implement).
P.T.O. System
Page 9 − 4
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 5)
3. Secure end yokes of P.T.O. drive shaft.
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
B. Install roll pin (item 11) in end yoke (item 10) and
gearbox shaft.
2. Disconnect end yoke of P.T.O. drive shaft (item 2)
from P.T.O. shaft:
C. Tighten lock nuts to secure end yokes to gearbox
shaft and P.T.O. shaft.
A. Straighten cotter pin (item 14) and remove cotter
pin from end yoke.
4. Lubricate P.T.O. drive shaft grease fittings (see Traction Unit Operator’s Manual).
B. Loosen two (2) cap screws and lock nuts.
C. Slide drive shaft end yoke from P.T.O. shaft.
3. Disconnect end yoke of P.T.O. drive shaft (item 10)
from cutting deck gearbox shaft:
1
A. Remove roll pin (item 11) from end yoke and
gearbox shaft.
2
B. Loosen two (2) cap screws and lock nuts.
C. Slide drive shaft end yoke from gearbox shaft.
4. Remove P.T.O. drive shaft from machine.
Installation (Fig. 5)
IMPORTANT: If the drive shaft tube and shaft were
separated, make sure that the slip shaft yoke and
slip tube yoke are aligned when the tube and shaft
are assembled (Fig. 3). Misalignment of the yokes
will result in shortened drive shaft life and will cause
unnecessary vibration when the cutting deck (or implement) is operated.
Figure 3
1. Slip shaft yoke
2. Slip tube yoke
1. Position P.T.O. drive shaft to machine. Make sure
that drive shaft slip shaft yoke (item 5) is toward cutting
deck gearbox shaft.
2. Align splines and slide P.T.O. drive shaft end yokes
onto P.T.O. shaft and gearbox shaft.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 9 − 5
P.T.O. System
P.T.O.
System
A. Install cotter pin (item 14) in end yoke (item 2) and
P.T.O. shaft.
P.T.O. Drive Shaft Cross and Bearing Service
1. Remove P.T.O. drive shaft from vehicle (see P.T.O.
Drive Shaft Removal in this section).
4
3
2. Remove snap rings that secure bearings in yokes.
IMPORTANT: Yokes must be supported when removing and installing bearings to prevent damage.
1
3. Use a press to remove cross and bearings from
yokes. Thoroughly clean drive shaft yokes.
4. To install new cross and bearings:
A. Apply a coating of grease to bearing bores to end
yoke and shaft yoke.
3
2
B. Press one bearing partially into yoke.
C. Insert cross into yoke and bearing.
Figure 4
D. Hold cross in alignment and press bearing in until
it hits the yoke.
1. End yoke
2. Cross and bearing kit
3. Snap ring (4 used)
4. Shaft yoke
E. Install snap ring into yoke groove to secure installed bearing.
F. Place second bearing into yoke bore and onto
cross shaft. Press bearing into yoke and secure with
snap ring.
G. Repeat procedure for other yoke.
H. Grease cross until grease comes out of all four (4)
cups.
5. Make sure that assembled joint moves without binding. Slight binding can usually be eliminated by lightly
rapping the yoke lugs with a soft faced hammer. If binding continues, disassemble joint to identify source of
binding.
6. Reinstall drive shaft to vehicle (see P.T.O. Drive
Shaft Installation in this section).
P.T.O. System
Page 9 − 6
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
P.T.O.
System
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 9 − 7
P.T.O. System
P.T.O. Shaft
LOCTITE #242
2
1
ANTISEIZE
LUBRICANT
20
19
3
17
5
13
18
9
4
11
21
16
RIGHT
6
FRONT
15
7
6
8
14
9
13
10
ANTISEIZE
LUBRICANT
12
11
Figure 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Cap screw
P.T.O. drive belt
Woodruff key
Cap screw (4 used)
Lock washer (4 used)
Washer (4 used)
Rubber mount (2 used)
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Cap screw (2 used)
Flange bearing
Grease fitting
Hex nut
Bushing support plate
Carriage screw
P.T.O. bearing bracket
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Lock nut (2 used)
P.T.O. shaft
P.T.O. tension shaft
P.T.O. pulley
Flat washer
Lock washer
P.T.O. drive shaft
Removal (Fig. 5)
WARNING
Do not start the engine and engage the P.T.O.
switch when the P.T.O. drive shaft is disconnected from the cutting deck (or implement). If
the engine is started and the P.T.O. shaft is allowed to rotate, serious injury could result.
Disconnect the P.T.O. electric clutch electrical
connector whenever the P.T.O. drive shaft is
disconnected from the cutting deck (or implement).
P.T.O. System
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove P.T.O. drive shaft from machine (see P.T.O.
Drive Shaft Removal in this section).
3. Remove P.T.O. drive belt from machine (see Traction
Unit Operator’s Manual).
4. Remove rear frame and axle assembly from machine (see Rear Frame and Axle Assembly Removal in
the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 7 − Chassis).
Page 9 − 8
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
6. Loosen set screws that secure front and rear flange
bearing locking collars to P.T.O. shaft. Using the blind
hole in each bearing collar as a striking point, unlock collars from P.T.O. shaft with a punch by rotating the collars
clockwise as viewed while facing forward.
4. Secure P.T.O. bearing bracket to frame with four (4)
cap screws and lock washers (Fig. 6).
5. Secure rear bearing flange to P.T.O. pivot shaft with
two (2) carriage screws and lock nuts.
6. Thoroughly clean tapers of P.T.O. shaft and pulley.
Apply antiseize lubricant to P.T.O. shaft taper. Position
woodruff key into shaft slot. Install pulley onto P.T.O.
shaft.
7. Support P.T.O. shaft to prevent it from falling.
8. Remove two (2) carriage screws and lock nuts that
secure rear bearing flange to the P.T.O. pivot shaft.
7. Apply Loctite #242 (or equivalent) to threads of cap
screw that secures pulley to P.T.O. shaft. Secure pulley
to P.T.O. shaft with cap screw and washer.
9. Remove four (4) cap screws and lock washers that
secure P.T.O. bearing bracket to frame (Fig. 6).
8. Install P.T.O. drive belt to machine (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual). Do not fully tension belt.
IMPORTANT: Make sure not to damage hydraulic
lines or other parts while removing the P.T.O. shaft
from machine.
9. Align P.T.O. pulley to electric clutch pulley (see Align
P.T.O. Pulley to Electric Clutch Pulley in this section).
10.Carefully lower P.T.O. shaft and remove from machine.
11. Slide flange bearings, bearing bracket and support
plate from P.T.O. shaft.
12.If required, disassemble front flange bearing, bearing bracket and support plate using Figure 5 as a guide.
Installation (Fig. 5)
1. If separated, assemble front front flange bearing,
bearing bracket and support plate:
10.After pulleys are aligned properly, make sure that
flange bearing locking collars are locked to P.T.O. shaft
and secured with set screws. Torque set screws from 85
to 100 in−lb (9.6 to 11.3 N−m). Also, make sure that
P.T.O. drive belt is properly tensioned (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
11. Install rear frame and axle assembly to machine (see
Rear Frame and Axle Assembly Installation in the Service and Repairs section of Chapter 7 − Chassis).
12.Install P.T.O. drive shaft to machine (see P.T.O. Drive
Shaft Installation in this section).
A. Secure flange bearing to support plate with two
(2) carriage screws and hex nuts.
B. Lubricate rubber mounts with soapy water and
install mounts into support plate. Make sure that
mounts slide completely into support plate.
1
2
C. Secure support plate to bearing bracket with cap
screws, washers and lock nuts. Make sure that
washers are placed on both sides of rubber mounts.
D. Make sure that bearing support plate is fully
seated against shoulders of rubber mounts and also
is parallel within .120” (3.0 mm) to bearing bracket.
2. Apply antiseize lubricant to flange bearing bores.
Install flange bearings onto P.T.O. shaft with locking collars orientated toward front of shaft.
Figure 6
1. P.T.O. shaft
2. P.T.O. bearing bracket
IMPORTANT: Make sure not to damage hydraulic
lines or other parts while installing the P.T.O. shaft
to machine.
3. Carefully raise P.T.O. shaft to machine.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 9 − 9
P.T.O. System
P.T.O.
System
5. Remove cap screw and washer that secure pulley to
P.T.O. shaft. Using a puller, remove pulley from P.T.O.
shaft. Locate and retrieve woodruff key.
Align P.T.O. Pulley to Electric Clutch Pulley
Check Pulley Alignment
Adjust Pulley Alignment
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck
(or implement), stop engine, engage parking brake and
remove key from the ignition switch.
1. With the P.T.O. belt installed, adjust the belt tension
screw until the compression spring begins to compress.
NOTE: Because the clutch pulley and P.T.O. pulley have
different thicknesses, check pulley alignment at pulley
grooves.
2. Measuring at the bottom of the pulleys, check that
the clutch and P.T.O. pulley grooves are aligned within
.060” (1.5 mm).
3. If the pulley grooves are not aligned within .060” (1.5
mm), the P.T.O. bearing locking collars must be loosened and the P.T.O. shaft moved to get proper pulley
alignment.
2. Loosen and remove set screws that secure front and
rear flange bearing locking collars to P.T.O. shaft. Using
the blind hole in each bearing collar as a striking point,
unlock collars from P.T.O. shaft with a punch by rotating
the collars clockwise as viewed while facing forward.
3. Shift the position of the P.T.O. shaft and pulley until
the P.T.O. pulley groove is aligned with the clutch pulley
groove.
4. Using the blind hole in each bearing collar as a striking point, lock collars to P.T.O. shaft with a punch by rotating the collars counterclockwise as viewed while
facing forward.
5. After tightening locking collars on P.T.O. flange bearings, recheck pulley alignment to ensure that alignment
did not change.
6. Apply Loctite #242 to locking collar set screws. Install
set screws into collars and torque from 85 to 100 in−lb
(9.6 to 11.3 N−m).
7. Adjust P.T.O. drive belt tension (see Traction Unit
Operator’s Manual).
P.T.O. System
Page 9 − 10
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chapter 10
Cutting Units
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factors That Can Affect Quality of Cut . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castor Wheel Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
2
3
3
4
4
SERVICE AND REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Idler Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Blade Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Blade Spindle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Castor Forks and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Cutting Deck Rollers and Skids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Page 10 − 1
Cutting Units
Cutting
Units
Table of Contents
General Information
Several cutting units are available for the Groundsmaster 3280−D and 3320. Refer to the Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual for specifications and optional
accessories for the cutting unit used on your Groundsmaster.
Cutting Units
Page 10 − 2
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Troubleshooting
There are a number of factors that can contribute to unsatisfactory quality of cut, some of which may be turf
conditions. Turf conditions such as excessive thatch,
uneven ground conditions, “sponginess” or attempting
to cut off too much grass height may not always be overcome by adjusting the cutting deck or machine.
Remember that the “effective” or actual height−of−cut
depends on cutting unit weight, tire pressures, hydraulic
counterbalance settings and turf conditions. Effective
height−of−cut will be different than the bench set height−
of−cut.
Cutting
Units
Factors That Can Affect Quality of Cut
Factor
Possible Problem/Correction
1. Maximum governed engine speed.
Check maximum governed engine speed. Adjust
engine speed to specifications if necessary (see
Chapter 3 − Gasoline Engine or Chapter 4 − Diesel
Engine).
2. Blade speed.
All cutting deck blades should rotate at the same
speed.
3. Tire pressure.
Check air pressure of all tires including castor tires.
Adjust to pressures specified in Operator’s Manual.
4. Blade condition.
Sharpen blades if their cutting edges are dull or nicked.
Inspect blade sail for wear or damage. Replace blade if
needed.
5. Mower housing condition.
Make sure that cutting chamber is in good condition.
Keep underside of deck clean. Debris buildup will
reduce cutting performance.
6. Height−of−cut.
Make sure all cutting deck height−of−cut adjustments
are the same. Adjust deck as specified in the Cutting
Unit Operator’s Manual.
7. Cutting deck alignment and ground following.
Check lift arms for wear, damage or binding. Also,
inspect for bent or damaged pivot shafts.
8. Roller and castor wheel condition.
All rollers and caster wheels should rotate freely.
Replace bearings if worn or damaged.
9. Grass conditions.
Mow when grass is dry for best cutting results. Also,
remove only 1” (2.5 cm) or 1/3 of the grass blade when
cutting.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 10 − 3
Cutting Units
Adjustments
CAUTION
Never install or work on the cutting deck or lift
arms with the engine running. Always stop engine and remove ignition key first.
See the Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual for adjustment
procedures for the cutting unit on the Groundsmaster
3280−D and 3320.
Castor Wheel Tire Pressure
Castor tires on the cutting deck should be inflated to 50
psi (3.5 bar).
Cutting Units
Page 10 − 4
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Cutting
Units
This page is intentionally blank.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 10 − 5
Cutting Units
Service and Repairs
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not start the engine and engage the P.T.O.
switch when the P.T.O. drive shaft is disconnected from the cutting deck (or implement). If
the engine is started and the P.T.O. shaft is allowed to rotate, serious personal injury and
machine damage could result. Disconnect the
P.T.O. electric clutch electrical connector
whenever the P.T.O. drive shaft is disconnected from the cutting deck (or implement).
Never install or work on the cutting deck or lift
arms with the engine running. Always stop engine and remove ignition key first.
Idler Assembly
8
7
6
5
9
10
9
11
12
1
4
2
3
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive belt
Cutting deck
Socket head screw
Idler pulley
Cutting Units
5.
6.
7.
8.
Idler spacer
Lock nut
Snap ring
Grease fitting
Page 10 − 6
9.
10.
11.
12.
Flange bushing
Idler arm
Torsion spring
Washer
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 1)
Installation (Fig. 1)
1. Park machine on a level surface with cutting deck
lowered. Stop engine, engage parking brake and remove key from the ignition switch.
1. Install removed idler components using Figure 1 as
a guide. Secure idler arm assembly to cutting deck with
snap ring.
2. Remove belt covers from top of cutting deck. Remove drive belt from deck pulleys (see Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
2. Insert nut driver or small piece of pipe onto the end
of the torsion spring for the idler arm.
3. Insert nut driver or small piece of pipe onto the end
of the torsion spring for the idler arm.
Be careful when applying tension to the idler arm
torsion spring. The spring is under heavy load
and may cause personal injury.
CAUTION
Be careful when removing tension from the idler
arm torsion spring. The spring is under heavy
load and may cause personal injury.
3. Carefully push down on the torsion spring end to get
the spring under the idler arm mounting plate. Then release the spring slowly to lock it into place.
4. Carefully push the torsion spring end down and away
from the idler arm to unhook the spring from the arm.
4. Install drive belt to pulleys (see Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
5. Remove snap ring that retains idler arm assembly to
cutting deck.
5. Install belt covers to cutting deck (see Cutting Unit
Operator’s Manual).
6. Remove idler components as needed using Figure
1 as a guide.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 10 − 7
Cutting Units
Cutting
Units
CAUTION
Blade Spindle
10
4
1
2
10
3
4
9
4
5
RIGHT
6
8
FRONT
85 to 110 ft−lb
(115 to 149 N−m)
7
Figure 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive pulley
Drive belt
Flange head screw (8 per spindle)
Drive spindle assembly
Cutting Units
5.
6.
7.
Flange nut (8 per spindle)
Cutting blade
Blade bolt
Page 10 − 8
8. Anti−scalp cup
9. Cutting deck
10. Idler pulley
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Removal (Fig. 2)
Installation (Fig. 2)
1. Park machine on a level surface with cutting deck
raised. Stop engine, engage parking brake and remove
key from the ignition switch. Support the cutting deck so
it cannot fall accidentally.
1. Position spindle on cutting deck noting orientation of
grease fitting (Fig. 3). Secure spindle assembly to deck
with eight (8) flange head screws and flange nuts.
3. Remove cutting blade, anti−scalp cup and blade bolt
from spindle to be serviced (see Cutting Unit Operator’s
Manual).
4. Remove eight (8) flange head screws and flange
nuts that secure spindle assembly to deck. Remove
spindle assembly from deck.
2. Install cutting blade, anti−scalp cup and blade bolt
(see Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual). Tighten blade bolt
from 85 to 110 ft−lb (115 to 149 N−m).
3. Slowly rotate cutting blades to verify that blades do
not contact any deck component(s).
4. Install drive belt to pulleys (see Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
5. Install belt covers to cutting deck (see Cutting Unit
Operator’s Manual).
1
3
RIGHT
FRONT
2
Figure 3
1.
RH spindle grease fitting
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
2.
Center spindle grease fitting
Page 10 − 9
3.
LH spindle grease fitting
Cutting Units
Cutting
Units
2. Remove belt covers from top of cutting deck. Remove drive belt from deck pulleys (see Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
Blade Spindle Service
Disassembly (Fig. 4)
2
1
1. Loosen and remove lock nut from top of spindle
shaft.
3
NOTE: Early production spindle assemblies included a
v−ring seal (item 4) which has been found to be unnecessary. Discard v−ring seal if found in spindle assembly.
130 to 150 ft−lb
(176 to 203 N−m)
4
5
2. Remove flat washer and pulley from shaft. If spindle
is equipped with a v−ring seal, remove and discard v−
ring seal.
6
8
7
9
3. Remove the spindle shaft from the spindle housing
which may require the use of an arbor press. The spindle
shaft spacer should remain on the spindle shaft as the
shaft is being removed.
10
6
4. Remove oil seals from spindle housing.
11
12
5. Allow the bearing cones, inner bearing spacer and
spacer ring to drop out of the spindle housing.
6. Using a punch and hammer, drive both of the bearing
cups out of the spindle housing. Remove the outer bearing spacer from the housing.
7. The large snap ring can remain inside the spindle
housing. Removal of this snap ring is very difficult.
Figure 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lock nut
Flat washer
Pulley
V−ring seal (if equipped)
O−ring
Oil seal
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Bearing set
Spacer set
Spindle housing
Grease fitting
Shaft spacer
Spindle shaft
Assembly (Fig. 4)
1
NOTE: A replacement spindle bearing set contains two
(2) bearings, a spacer ring and a large snap ring (Fig. 5).
These parts cannot be purchased separately. A replacement spacer set includes the inner spacer and outer
spacer.
IMPORTANT: If new bearings are installed into a
used spindle housing, it may not be necessary to replace the original large snap ring. If the original
snap ring is in good condition with no evidence of
damage (e.g. spun bearing), leave the snap ring in
the housing and discard the snap ring that comes
with the new bearings. If the large snap ring is found
to be damaged, replace the snap ring. Replacement
bearings are sold only with a matched spacer ring
and large snap ring (Fig. 5). These parts cannot be
purchased separately.
4
2
5
3
1
Figure 5
1. Bearing
2. Spacer ring
3. Large snap ring
4. Inner spacer
5. Outer spacer
1. If large snap ring was removed from spindle housing,
install snap ring into housing groove. Make sure snap
ring is fully seated in housing groove.
2. Install outer bearing spacer into top of spindle housing. The spacer should fit against the snap ring.
Cutting Units
Page 10 − 10 Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
3. Using an arbor press, push the bearing cups into the
top and bottom of the spindle housing. The top bearing
cup must contact the outer spacer previously installed,
and the bottom bearing cup must contact the snap ring.
Make sure that the assembly is correct by supporting the
first bearing cup and pressing the second against it (Fig
6).
4
3
1
5. Install lower bearing cone and oil seal into bottom of
spindle housing. Note: The bottom seal must have the
lip facing out (down) (Fig. 7).
6
2
5
Cutting
Units
4. Pack the bearing cones with grease. Apply a film of
grease on lips of oil seals and o−ring.
PRESS
Figure 6
IMPORTANT: If bearings are being replaced, make
sure to use the spacer ring that is included in bearing set.
1. Bearing cup
2. Large snap ring
3. Outer spacer
4. Arbor press
5. Support
6. Arbor press base
6. Slide spacer ring and inner bearing spacer into
spindle housing, then install upper bearing cone and oil
seal into top of housing. Note: The upper seal must have
the lip facing in (down) (Fig. 7). When properly installed,
the upper seal should be recessed .095” (2.4 mm) into
the housing.
.095” (2.4 mm)
7. Inspect the spindle shaft and shaft spacer to make
sure they are free of burrs or nicks that could possibly
damage the oil seals. Lubricate the shaft with grease.
2
8. Install spindle shaft spacer onto shaft. Carefully slide
spindle shaft with spacer up through spindle housing.
The bottom oil seal and spindle spacer fit together when
the spindle is installed fully.
1
9. Install greased o−ring to top of spindle shaft (Fig. 8).
NOTE: Early production spindle assemblies included a
v−ring seal which has been found to be unnecessary. Do
not install a v−ring seal when assembling the spindle.
Figure 7
1. Bottom seal installation
10.Install pulley (hub down), flat washer and lock nut to
spindle shaft. Tighten lock nut from 130 to 150 ft−lb (176
to 203 N−m).
2. Upper seal installation
4
3
IMPORTANT: Pneumatic grease guns can produce
air pockets when filling large cavities and therefore,
are not recommended to be used for proper greasing of spindle housings.
1
11. Attach a hand pump grease gun to grease fitting on
housing and fill housing cavity with grease until grease
starts to come out of lower seal.
2
12.Rotate spindle shaft to make sure that it turns freely.
Figure 8
1. Upper seal
2. O−ring
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 10 − 11 Rev. A
3. Flat washer
4. Lock nut
Cutting Units
Gearbox
15
14
16
13
17
12
13
12
11
18
19
10
9
11
8
14
3
1
2
7
3
3
6
5
4
175 in−lb
(19.8 N−m)
RIGHT
FRONT
Figure 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Drive pulley
Drive belt
Spindle assembly
Set screw (2 used)
Taper lock bushing
Cutting deck
Idler pulley
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Carriage screw (3 used)
Deck gearbox mounting plate
Woodruff key
Mount (4 used)
Gearbox bracket (2 used)
Flat washer (4 used)
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Flange nut
Gearbox assembly
P.T.O. drive shaft end yoke
Cap screw
Lock washer (4 used)
Cap screw (4 used)
Removal (Fig. 9)
1. Park machine on a level surface, lower cutting deck,
stop engine, engage parking brake and remove key
from the ignition switch.
2. Remove belt covers from top of cutting deck (see
Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
3. Remove drive belt from deck pulleys (see Cutting
Unit Operator’s Manual).
Cutting Units
WARNING
Do not start the engine and engage the P.T.O.
switch when the P.T.O. drive shaft is disconnected from the cutting deck (or implement). If
the engine is started and the P.T.O. shaft is allowed to rotate, serious injury could result.
Disconnect the P.T.O. electric clutch electrical
connector whenever the P.T.O. drive shaft is
disconnected from the cutting deck (or implement).
Page 10 − 12
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
4. Disconnect P.T.O. drive shaft from gearbox (see
P.T.O. Drive Shaft Removal in Service and Repairs section of Chapter 9 − P.T.O. System).
9. Connect P.T.O. drive shaft to gearbox (see P.T.O.
Drive Shaft Installation in Service and Repairs section
of Chapter 9 − P.T.O. System).
5. Remove four (4) cap screws (item 17) and lock washers (item 16) that secure gearbox assembly to gearbox
brackets.
10.Install drive belt and belt covers to cutting deck (see
Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual).
11. Torque plug in gearbox to 175 in−lb (19.8 N−m). Fill
gearbox with lubricant (see Cutting Unit Operator’s
Manual). Install dipstick in gearbox and torque to 175 in−
lb (19.8 N−m).
7. Remove gearbox assembly with drive pulley attached from deck. Drain lubricant from gearbox.
Cutting
Units
6. Remove fasteners that secure left side gearbox
bracket (item 12) to deck mounting plate. Remove
bracket from deck.
2
8. Remove two (2) set screws that secure taper lock
bushing to drive pulley on gearbox shaft.
9. Thread one of the removed set screws into threaded
hole of bushing (Fig. 10). Tighten set screw to loosen
bushing from pulley hub.
10.Slide bushing and pulley from gearbox shaft. Locate
and retrieve woodruff key.
Figure 10
11. If necessary, remove and replace oil seals and oil
caps in gearbox (Fig. 11).
NOTE: If internal gearbox wear or damage occurs,
gearbox replacement is necessary. Internal gearbox
components are not available.
1
1
1. Set screw installation position
2. Set screw removal position
175 in−lb
(19.8 N−m)
175 in−lb
(19.8 N−m)
1
Installation (Fig. 9)
1. If oil seals or seal caps were removed, use a press
to install seals or caps so they are flush with the gearbox
housing. With seals installed, rolling torque for gearbox
input shaft should be 5 to 10 in−lb (.56 to 1.13 N−m).
2
6
2. Clean gearbox output shaft, pulley ID and taper lock
bushing thoroughly.
3
3. Position woodruff key, pulley and then taper lock
bushing to gearbox output shaft. Slide bushing to shoulder on shaft. Align threaded holes of pulley with non−
threaded holes of bushing.
4
4. Lightly oil threads of set screws and install screws
into threads of pulley (Fig. 10). Alternately and evenly
tighten set screws to a torque of 175 in−lb (19.8 N−m).
5
5. Fill allen recess in set screws and bushing threads
with grease to prevent dirt from packing into crevices.
6. Position gearbox assembly with drive pulley attached to deck.
7. Position and secure left side gearbox bracket (item
12) to deck mounting plate.
Figure 11
1. Oil cap
2. Dipstick
3. Oil cap
4. Gearbox
5. Oil seal
6. Plug
8. Secure gearbox assembly to gearbox brackets with
four (4) cap screws (item 17) and lock washers (item 16).
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 10 − 13
Cutting Units
Castor Forks and Wheels
21
22
20
19
23
18
15
1
16
2
17
16
15
14
13
3
5
12
4
11
10
5
9
8
7
6
Figure 12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Castor arm (RH shown)
Cap screw (5 used per arm)
Cap screw
Inner bearing spacer
Bearing
Wheel hub
Wheel rim half
Inner tube
Cutting Units
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Castor tire
Wheel rim half
Plate
Flange nut (4 used)
Lock nut
Castor fork
Thrust washer
Flange bushing
Page 10 − 14
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Grease fitting
Spacer
Retaining ring
Cap washer
Cap
Compression spring
Flange nut (5 used per arm)
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
2. If bearings were removed from wheel hub:
1. Disassemble castor forks and wheels as required
using Figure 12 as a guide.
A. Press first bearing into hub until it contacts shoulder of hub.
Assembly (Fig. 12)
B. Place inner bearing spacer in hub and then press
second bearing into hub.
1. Assemble castor forks and wheels using Figure 12
as a guide. Make sure that thrust washers (item 15) are
positioned directly above and below castor arm bushings.
C. Check that spacer fits tightly between bearings
after hub assembly.
3. If castor fork was removed from castor arm, lubricate
grease fitting.
4. See Cutting Unit Operator’s Manual for castor wheel
adjustment.
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 10 − 15
Cutting Units
Cutting
Units
Disassembly (Fig. 12)
Cutting Deck Rollers and Skids
15
1
14
13
2
12
3
3
11
RIGHT
10
2
3
8
9
4
FRONT
5
7
6
Figure 13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cutting deck
Carriage screw
Flange nut
LH skid
Cap screw
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Roller spacer
Roller
Flange nut
Lock nut
Roller (2 used)
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Cap screw
Roller
Roller shaft
Flange head screw
RH skid
Removal (Fig. 13)
Installation (Fig. 13)
1. Remove skids and rollers from cutting deck using
Figure 13 as a guide.
1. Install skids to cutting deck using Figure 13 as a
guide. Make sure to install skids in the same mounting
hole height position (lower or upper).
2. When installing rollers to deck, tighten nut until roller
will not rotate, then loosen nut only enough to allow roller
to rotate freely. Make sure to install all cutting deck rollers in the same mounting hole height position (lower or
upper).
Cutting Units
Page 10 − 16
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Chapter 11
Electrical Diagrams
Table of Contents
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Page 11 − 1 Rev. A
Electrical
Diagrams
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS
Groundsmaster 3280−D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Groundsmaster 3320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
GROUNDSMASTER 3280−D CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Glow Plug Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Crank Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Run (Transport) Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Run (Mow) Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
GROUNDSMASTER 3320 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Crank Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Run (Transport) Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Run (Mow) Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GROUNDSMASTER 3280−D WIRE HARNESS
DRAWINGS
Main Wire Harness Drawing
(Serial Numbers below 260000000) . . . . . . . . 12
Main Wire Harness Diagram
(Serial Numbers below 260000000) . . . . . . . . 13
Main Wire Harness Drawing
(Serial Numbers above 260000000) . . . . . . . . 14
Main Wire Harness Diagram
(Serial Numbers above 260000000) . . . . . . . . 15
GROUNDSMASTER
3320
WIRE
HARNESS
DRAWINGS
Main Wire Harness Drawing
(Serial Numbers below 260000000) . . . . . . . . 16
Main Wire Harness Diagram
(Serial Numbers below 260000000) . . . . . . . . 17
Main Wire Harness Drawing
(Serial Numbers above 260000000) . . . . . . . . 18
Main Wire Harness Diagram
(Serial Numbers above 260000000) . . . . . . . . 19
Electrical Diagrams
This page is intentionally blank.
Electrical Diagrams
Page 11 − 2
Groundsmaster 3280−D/3320
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Electrical Schematic
All relays and solenoids
are shown as de−energized.
All ground wires are black.
Page 11 − 3
SEAT SWITCH
Groundsmaster 3320
Electrical Schematic
All relays and solenoids
are shown as de−energized.
All ground wires are black.
Page 11 − 4
(IN RUN POSITION)
(ENERGIZED)
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Glow Plug Circuit
Power Current
Control Current
Indicator/Gauge Current
Page 11 − 5
(PARKING BRAKE ON)
(IN START POSITION)
(SEAT OCCUPIED)
(IN NEUTRAL)
(PTO OFF)
(ENERGIZED)
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Crank Circuit
Power Current
Control Current
Indicator/Gauge Current
Page 11 − 6
(PARKING BRAKE OFF)
(SEAT OCCUPIED)
(IN RUN POSITION)
(NOT IN NEUTRAL)
(PTO OFF)
(NOT ENERGIZED)
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Run (Transport) Circuit
Power Current
Control Current
Indicator/Gauge Current
Page 11 − 7
(PARKING BRAKE OFF)
(SEAT OCCUPIED)
(IN RUN POSITION)
(NOT IN NEUTRAL)
(PTO ON)
(NOT ENERGIZED)
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Run (Mow) Circuit
Power Current
Control Current
Indicator/Gauge Current
Page 11 − 8
(IN NEUTRAL)
(IN START POSITION)
(PARKING BRAKE ON)
(SEAT OCCUPIED)
(PTO OFF)
(ENERGIZED)
Groundsmaster 3320
Crank Circuit
Power Current
Control Current
Indicator/Gauge Current
Page 11 − 9
(NOT IN NEUTRAL)
(IN RUN POSITION)
(PARKING BRAKE OFF)
(SEAT OCCUPIED)
(PTO OFF)
(ENERGIZED)
Groundsmaster 3320
Run (Transport) Circuit
Power Current
Control Current
Indicator/Gauge Current
Page 11 − 10
(NOT IN NEUTRAL)
(IN RUN POSITION)
(PARKING BRAKE OFF)
(SEAT OCCUPIED)
(PTO ON)
(ENERGIZED)
Groundsmaster 3320
Run (Mow) Circuit
Power Current
Control Current
Indicator/Gauge Current
Page 11 − 11
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Main Wire Harness Drawing
(Serial Numbers below 260000000)
Page 11 − 12
Rev. A
YELLOW
ORANGE
BLACK
GREEN
VIOLET
PINK
BROWN
BLACK
BLACK
GRAY
GREEN
TAN
BLUE/WHITE
BLUE
BLACK
BLACK
YELLOW
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
FUSIBLE LINK
BLACK
WHITE
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
PINK
WHITE/BLACK
BLACK
RED/BLACK
BLACK
PINK
PINK
PINK
PINK
WHITE
TAN
ORANGE
PINK
YELLOW
PINK
ORANGE
YELLOW
PINK
VIOLET
PINK
BLACK/WHITE
RED
RED
ORANGE
PINK
PINK
RED
RED
PINK
RED
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Main Wire Harness Diagram
(Serial Numbers below 260000000)
Page 11 − 13
Rev. A
SN 280000001
AND UP
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Main Wire Harness Drawing
(Serial Numbers above 260000000)
Page 11 − 14
Rev. A
SN 260000001
TO 270999999
YELLOW
ORANGE
BLACK
GREEN
VIOLET
PINK
BROWN
BLACK
BLACK
GRAY
GREEN
TAN
BLUE/WHITE
BLUE
BLACK
YELLOW
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
FUSIBLE LINK
BLACK
WHITE
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
PINK
WHITE/BLACK
BLACK
RED/BLACK
BLACK
RED
PINK
BLACK
PINK
RED
PINK
PINK
PINK
WHITE
TAN
ORANGE
PINK
YELLOW
PINK
ORANGE
YELLOW
PINK
VIOLET
PINK
BLACK/WHITE
RED
RED
ORANGE
PINK
RED
RED
PINK
RED
Groundsmaster 3280−D
Main Wire Harness Diagram
(Serial Numbers above 260000000)
Page 11 − 15
Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3320
Main Wire Harness Drawing
(Serial Numbers below 260000000)
Page 11 − 16
Rev. A
WHITE
GREEN
YELLOW
ORANGE
BLACK
GREEN
VIOLET
BLACK
PINK
BROWN
BLACK
GRAY
TAN
BLUE/WHITE
BLUE
BLACK
YELLOW
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
WHITE/BLACK
BLACK
PINK
PINK
BROWN
RED/BLACK
PINK
PINK
PINK
RED/BLACK
WHITE
TAN
ORANGE
YELLOW
YELLOW
PINK
PINK
BLACK
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
PINK
RED/BLACK
RED
BLUE
BROWN
BLUE
ORANGE
WHITE
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
GREEN
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
PINK
PINK
RED
RED
RED
Groundsmaster 3320
Main Wire Harness Diagram
(Serial Numbers below 260000000)
Page 11 − 17
Rev. A
Groundsmaster 3320
Main Wire Harness Drawing
(Serial Numbers above 260000000)
Page 11 − 18
Rev. A
WHITE
GREEN
YELLOW
ORANGE
BLACK
GREEN
VIOLET
BLACK
PINK
BROWN
BLACK
GRAY
TAN
BLUE/WHITE
BLUE
BLACK
YELLOW
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
WHITE/BLACK
BLACK
PINK
PINK
BROWN
RED/BLACK
PINK
PINK
RED
BLACK
PINK
RED/BLACK
WHITE
RED
PINK
TAN
ORANGE
YELLOW
YELLOW
PINK
PINK
BLACK
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
PINK
RED/BLACK
RED
BLUE
BROWN
BLUE
ORANGE
WHITE
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
GREEN
RED/BLACK
RED/BLACK
PINK
RED
RED
RED
Groundsmaster 3320
Main Wire Harness Diagram
(Serial Numbers above 260000000)
Page 11 − 19
Rev. A
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement